JP7078998B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a predetermined special result, a display device and an effect control means for controlling the effect by the display device are provided. The effect control means can display a variable display effect that performs variable display and stop display of a plurality of identification symbols on the display device, and a gaming machine in which the identification symbol is composed of a frame image, an identification image, and a character image. It is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-144137

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decline in the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that can execute a variable display game based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions
A means for executing the variable display game by performing variable display and stop display of a symbol in each of a plurality of variable display areas is provided.
The symbol has a symbol configuration including an identification image and an erasable character image.
The character image is erased by causing the symbol to perform an operation different from the variation display of the symbol, high-speed variation display is performed in a configuration that does not include the character image, and then the symbol is displayed.
The high-speed fluctuation display was converted to a low-speed fluctuation display in which the symbol was varied and displayed at an identifiable speed, and an image hiding the symbol was displayed during the temporary stop display after the low-speed fluctuation display to make the symbol invisible . The first variation mode in which the image that hides the symbol is later erased to make the character image appear , and then the stop display is performed .
The high - speed fluctuation display is converted into the low -speed fluctuation display in which the symbol is variablely displayed at an identifiable speed, the character image is made to appear in the low-speed fluctuation display, and then the character image is displayed in a shorter period than the first fluctuation mode. The second variation mode in which the temporary stop display is performed and then the stop display is performed , and
The variable display game can be executed on at least one of the above .
The execution period of the variation display game in which the first variation mode is executed is longer than the execution period of the variation display game in which the second variation mode is executed .

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining the common process of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the variation start process in FIG. 1, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the variation start process in FIG. 2. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process in the middle of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in a staging control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a figure explaining another example of setting of the probability setting value. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the determination condition monitoring process in 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the transition determination process in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the state of the switch corresponding to the probability setting value in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the schematic structure of the setting means and the game control device in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the character appearance fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the character appearance fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the character appearance fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the character appearance fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the character appearance fluctuation. It is a figure which shows an example of the exploded perspective view of the effect button. It is a figure explaining operation promotion effect. It is a figure explaining operation promotion effect. It is a figure explaining operation promotion effect. It is a figure explaining operation promotion effect. It is a figure explaining operation promotion effect. It is a figure explaining operation promotion effect. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view explaining the operation of the upper movable decorative unit in 2nd Embodiment, (a) the figure which shows the state which the 1st upper movable member was operated, (b) the state which the 2nd upper movable member was operated. It is a figure which shows. It is a figure explaining the operation of the light emitting decoration part in 2nd Embodiment, and is the figure which shows (a) and (b) the covering state, and is the figure which shows (c) and (d) the retracted state. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the 1st upper movable member in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st upper movable member in 2nd Embodiment, and is the figure which showed (a) the light emitting decoration part omitted, and (b) the light emitting decoration part. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the light emitting unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the character assembly production. It is a figure explaining the character assembly production.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, the front frame (main body frame) 12 has a game board 3
A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of 0 is attached.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in the abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, a sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided in the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (which supplies a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown))
(Reservoir), the upper plate ball outlet 22 from which the game balls paid out from the payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 flow out, and the upper plate 21 paid out with the upper plate 21 full. A lower plate (dish) 23 for storing and an operation handle 24 for a hitting ball launching device are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub-display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. Balance display section that displays the balance of the prepaid card (not shown)
Etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation handle 24, the hitting ball launching device moves the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. Further, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30.
It is surrounded by 3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. Display device 41
Is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (brown tube). In the area (display area) where the image on the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.
Further, on the left and right portions of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 is provided, which is a movable effect device for producing a game including a special figure variation display game by an operating movable effect member. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

Further, in the lower left of the center case 40, a sub that displays the fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variation display game separately from the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41, and displays the start memory number. An information display device 90 is provided.

The sub-information display device 90 is a first light emitting unit composed of a single light emitting unit forming a sub-game display unit for displaying a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game. A second sub composed of a sub-game display unit 91 and a single light emitting unit forming a sub-game display unit that displays a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game. A game display unit 92 is provided. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game by the two light emitting units, and the second special figure variation display game are executed by the two light emitting units. A second sub-display unit 94 indicating the number of second start-up memories, which is the right to do so, is provided.

In the first sub-game display unit 91 and the second sub-game display unit 92, the light emitting unit turns off, blinks, and lights a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the variation display and a display indicating the result. Can be displayed by. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 and the second sub-display unit 94 turn off the two light emitting units, respectively, for the number of the first start storage (holding in FIG. 1) and the second starting memory (holding in special figure 2). It can be displayed by blinking and lighting.

By providing the sub information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the fourth symbol is displayed in the display device 4.
By displaying in 1, the display area of the display device 41 is not occupied, and the display area can be effectively utilized. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operating range of the board effect device 44 so that the sub information display device 90 is not covered in the process of operating the board effect device 44. ..

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate 34 (a normal figure start gate, a start area, an inflow area) that gives a start condition of a normal map variation display game is provided. The game ball that won the prize at the normal start gate 34 is the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
Is detected by.
Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are three general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the starting gate 34 in the normal drawing. The game balls that have won in these general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that gives a starting condition for the first special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won a prize in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, immediately below the start winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that gives a starting condition for the second special figure variation display game is provided.
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in.
At all times, it maintains a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easily opened by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (a state that is advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normally variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may win a prize in the closed state rather than in the open state.
Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, there is a special variation that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is arranged.
The special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. From the closed state (closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (closed state)
Convert to a state that is advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 is, for example,
Opening / closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device
Equipped with a large winning opening that can be opened and closed by It is designed to give the player a predetermined game value (prize ball). Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. .. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the game ball flowing into the large winning opening is detected by any of the large winning opening switches 38a. By providing a plurality of large winning opening switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player can adjust the firing force and launch the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to aim for a prize in the start winning opening 36, and launch the game ball to the right game area (so-called left-handed). Right-handed) to start the normal figure start gate 34 and normal variable winning device 3
It is possible to aim for a prize in 7 or the special variable prize device 38.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right gaming region, and is launched into the right gaming region. The resulting game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. Since the material at least on the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows the game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like can see the flow path. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are reached. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map fluctuation display game triggered by a prize and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The second special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display unit (normal figure display) 53 for the normal figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and the same LED lamp. It is provided with storage display units 54, 55, 56 for notifying the start storage number of each variation display game composed of.
Further, the batch display device 50 has a first game state display unit (first game state display, right-handed notification unit) 57, which notifies that the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed game state. The second game state display unit (second game state display, time reduction state notification unit) 58 that lights up when a state occurs to notify the occurrence of a time reduction state, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on is a high probability state. Third game status display unit (third game status display, probability status display unit) 59,
Round display unit 6 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed)
0 is provided.
The batch display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display device) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of the big hit.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven to change. It is configured to indicate that it is inside.
Then, when the result of the game is "missing", for example, the central segment is turned on as the result mode of the loss, and when the result of the game is "hit", the result mode of the hit (special result mode) is not. The game result is displayed by turning on the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode.

The normal figure display 53 blinks the lamp during the fluctuation to indicate that the fluctuation is in progress, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode and a lighting color according to the result of the game. Further, the normal figure hold display 56 displays the start storage number (= hold number) of the normal figure start gate 34, which is a fluctuation start condition of the normal figure display 53, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of LEDs. Special figure 1 Hold display 54
In the special figure 1 display 51, the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = pending number) among the number of winning balls to the starting winning opening 36, which is a condition for starting fluctuation, is determined by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. indicate. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 sets the number of start storages (= number of holds) of the second start winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, by turning off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting.

The first game status display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the lamp is turned off when the left-handed is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed (normal hit). When the game state is such that right-handed is more advantageous to the player than left-handed (when right-handed), the lamp is turned on.

The second game status display unit (time reduction status notification unit) 58 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the lamp is turned off in the normal gaming state (when the fluctuation time reduction function is not activated) in which the time reduction state does not occur. When the time saving state has occurred (when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

The third game state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the game machine 1
When the probability state of the jackpot is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the power of 0 is turned on, the lamp is turned off, and when the probability state of the jackpot is a high probability state (probability change state) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Turns on the lamp.

The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state is not in progress, the lamp is turned off, and in the special game state, a lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result is displayed. Turn it on. The round display unit may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (IC) called an amusement chip (IC).
It includes a CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. The electronic components such as the game control device 100 and the solenoid and the motor driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and D generated by the power supply device 400.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as C5V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 generates the DC voltage of DC32V from the AC power supply of 24V.
The power supply voltage is applied to the normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter or a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from the DC32V voltage and the internal RAM of the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure. Supply backup power supply unit 420
A power failure monitoring circuit is provided, and the game control device 100 is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the occurrence and recovery of a power failure.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, mainly. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is the game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100.
The data supplied to 1 (particularly the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power cutoff. That is, it is a backup storage means capable of holding the data stored in the game control device 100 even when the power is cut off. Then, when the power is restored, control can be resumed based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point. The power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is provided with M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. When the special result mode is adopted, the gaming state is advantageous for the player (special gaming state).
At the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed in the gaming machine 10
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the conditions for the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions are satisfied (for example, the same). The state of identification information,
However, the special result mode may be excluded), and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value is no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <
It is getting higher in the order of premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (not shown).
Random number generation to generate variation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the variation display game in various reach and variation display without reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock variation display game, etc. It is equipped with a circuit and a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of a random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result of a special figure variation display game (hit (hit (hit (hit)).
(Big hit or small hit) or miss), the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the operating state (time reduction) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current game state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the operating state), the number of start storages, and the like. Here, CPU
The 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the payout control device 200. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, and a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37. It is connected to the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 in the starting gate 34, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is negative such as 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided to which a logic signal is input and converted into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F1
Of the outputs of 21, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, the third input port 124 is changed to a set value that serves as a detection means for detecting an operation in the operation unit for selecting a probability set value to which a probability value that is a special result in a special figure variation display game is assigned from a plurality of. Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

The setting key switch 152 detects the operation of the setting key operation unit that forms the first operation unit of the operation units. The setting key operation unit is provided with a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the second position.
It turns off when it is not turned to the position.

The set value change switch 151 detects the operation of the set value change button forming the second operation unit of the operation units. The setting value change button is a push-type button, and the setting value change switch 151 is turned on when the setting value change button is pressed.
If it is not pressed, it will be turned off.

By operating these operation units, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is a game. It is supposed to be used. Here, six settings 1 to 6 are prepared as probability setting values. The probability values assigned to each probability setting value are 1/320 for setting 1, 1/310 for setting 2, 1/300 for setting 3, 1/290 for setting 4, and 1/28 for setting 5.
0, setting 6 is 1/270. This probability value is a probability value in a normal probability state,
The probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state.

When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and then the power of the gaming machine is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. The probability setting value can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by pressing the setting value change button in this probability setting value change state. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

Further, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is pressed. When turned to the second position, the currently selected probability setting value is the probability setting value display device 153.
However, the probability setting value cannot be changed. The probability setting value confirmation mode is set.

The probability setting value display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and the probability setting value is 1 to 1.
It is designed to be displayed as a number of 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a probability set value may be indicated depending on the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like. Further, the probability set value display device 153 may not be provided, and the probability set value information may be displayed by using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio.
In this case, the information of the probability setting value is displayed while the operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), and other than that, the calculated base value and the accessory ratio are displayed. Give priority to display.

In this embodiment, the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, and the probability setting value display device 15
3 and the like are provided in the game control device 100, and the game control device 100 selects a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a lottery of a special figure variation display game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit. It is supposed to be a setting means that enables it. The function of the setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100. That is, the setting means may be provided separately from the game control device 100. In this case, the operation signal of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control device 100 so that the game control device 100 changes the probability setting value, or the setting sub-board side may change the probability setting value. The probability setting value is changed and determined based on the operation of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152.
The determination result may be transmitted to the game control device 100.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is the main board 10.
It is also supplied from 0 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70.
Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37
The detection signal of a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is an enable signal CE by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, in the input unit 120, a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not the 200 can accept commands), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24). Signal based on), out ball detection switch signal (signal based on detection by the out switch that detects all game balls fired in the game area 32 and finished the game), and the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 A first input port 122 is provided.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is used for each port 122, 123, of the input unit 120.
Not supplied to 124. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the staging control device 300.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. ing. The port on the relay board 70 has a game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special variable winning device 38, and a movable member 37 of the normal variable winning device 37.
The second for outputting the opening / closing data of the solenoid (normal electric solenoid) 37c that opens b.
An output port 134 is provided. Further, the second output port 134 outputs the display data of the status display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. On / on the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, on the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game store (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 153 that displays the selected probability setting value.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the open / close data signals of the large winning port solenoid 38b and the general electric current solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal to the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The second driver 1 that outputs the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135.
38b, the third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw side of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137 supply to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d for outputting an external information signal to be output to the external information terminal board 71, and a fifth driver 138e for receiving display data output from the second output port 134 and displaying the display data on the status display device 160 are provided. ..

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. Photocoupler 13
Reference numeral 9 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the staging control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The staging control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , Sound source LSI 314 that controls the sound output to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It is equipped with.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read-only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A holdable FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal INT from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is to be entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the staging control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and a sub information display device 90. 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (including a center case 40). Board effect device 4 provided
A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling 4 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are the address / data bus 340.
It is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via. The glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for staging), and a frame forming a movable staging device for producing a game including a special figure variation display game by a movable staging member that operates. A staging device may be provided, and a frame staging movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame staging device may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. A function to detect the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the staging control device 300 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the staging control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the motor or electronic components controlled by the DC voltage. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Further, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V.
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as, DC 3.3V based on DC 5V.
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V is provided in the staging control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control the lamp, the motor, and the like are supplied to reset the state. Further, the staging control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
When the N45 is connected and the power of the staging control device 300 is turned on, the cooling FAN45 is driven.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a gaming ball (a gaming ball () from a launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32.
The game is played by launching a pachinko ball). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38 is won, or the game flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and is discharged from the gaming area 32. And the general winning opening 35
When a game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, the number of winning balls according to the type of winning winning opening is controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3). It is discharged from the payout unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 is provided in the normal figure start gate 34.
When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. CPU 11 of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100
In 1A, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, if the normal figure start memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), the normal figure start memory number is set. Add (+1) and store one normal figure start memory in ROM111B. The stored number of the normal map start prize is displayed on the normal map hold display 56 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory for starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game is judged. Then, the process of starting the normal map fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time on the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50 as a process for executing the normal map variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the ordered order, the process of displaying the normal map fluctuation display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.
In addition, the general figure display 53 is composed of a display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information.
It is also possible to use a character symbol or the like to display the variable for a predetermined time and then stop and display the result.

When the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, a lighting pattern that is one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol having a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display 53 according to the type of hit. Along with displaying a stop, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to control the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is out of sync, the normal map display 53 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the out of alignment.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) of the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is set.
The second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces). Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the big hit random value, the big hit symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start storage and the second start storage. The number of stored start storages is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory. Displayed as a display. It is also displayed on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

Then, when the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game becomes ready to start, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The big hit determination random value is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B and set according to the probability setting value, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

Then, when the first special figure variation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display device 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined variation time. After the display during the change of the special figure 1 is performed, the process of displaying the first special figure change display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. Further, when the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the display during the change of the special figure 2 is performed, the process of displaying the second special figure change display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.

Further, in the staging control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 (variation display device) corresponds to the special figure fluctuation display game, and a plurality of types of identification information (for example,
Displaying decorative special figure variable display games that display numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. in a variable manner Performs processing to display the game. Further, the sub-game display unit of the sub-information display device 90 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game that changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit in response to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

In the decorative special symbol variation display game in the display device 41, for example, in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is displayed in the left variable display area (first special symbol).
In each of the right fluctuation display area (second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variablely displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to distinguish. Then, the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode composed of the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs various staging displays such as the appearance of characters in order to improve the interest.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. In addition to displaying the lighting pattern, processing is performed to generate a special game state or a small hit game state. In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

In the process of generating a special game state or a small hit game state, C of the game control device 100
The PU111A controls, for example, by opening the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b so that the game ball can flow into the large winning opening. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening is satisfied. To open 1
A round is set, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 is in a time-saving state (specific game state, high probability state in normal drawing, second operation state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game.
Can be generated. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) should be a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the probability of normal drawing is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.
That is, the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 is configured to be controlled by either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than the first operating state. ..

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 6.
When it becomes 00 msec and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500) of the first hit stop symbol
msec x 1 time), the opening time of the second stop symbol (normal power opening time) and the number of opening times (for example, 17)
00msec x 2 times), opening time of the third stop symbol (normal power opening time) and opening number of times (for example)
It is possible to set it to be 1700 msec x 3 times).

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal electric opening number of times, and the normal electric opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game (
It is possible to control the second fluctuation time, which is shorter than the first fluctuation time (for example, 10,000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the one opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1).
352 ms). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is set to the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (for example, twice) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game.
It is possible to set the second opening number of times to be larger than (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It can be a probability (a high probability state in the normal map, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal power probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the time-saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display may be performed independently or not at the same time. The game is displayed. Further, the display device 41 may also use different display devices or different display areas in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or use the same display device or display area. However, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed so that they are not executed independently or at the same time. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. again,
The second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, if there is a start memory of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game can be executed, the second special figure variation display game is played. It is designed to be executed (priority is executed). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36 is not particularly limited.
a, Starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, gate switch 34a, winning port switch 35a, large winning port switch 38a, out switch for detecting all game balls that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game. Is equipped with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil is used. There is. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and a predetermined register (step S3) is specified.
For example, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in the D register) (step S4).
.. In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step S4. Next, the firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6),
A process for setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that is a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

The setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 1 are connected to the third input port 124.
A signal from 52 and a signal from the main body frame opening detection switch are input, and by reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the setting value change switch 151 at the time of power-on. The state of the setting key switch 152 and the open state of the front frame 12 (main body frame) can be grasped. As described above, when the power is turned on with the front frame 12 open and the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value can be changed in the probability setting value change state. Will be. Also, if the power is turned on while the setting value change button is pressed without turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position, the RAM
The 111C is cleared (initialized).

By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the set value change button can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the standby time has elapsed, it is necessary to continue to operate the set value change button from the power-on to the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it is not necessary to perform such a troublesome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power is not accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed.
First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10;
N) returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. in this way,
By determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem when the power is turned on. ..

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step S12). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step S)
12; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step S).
12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM (step S13), and off-data is output (output) to all output ports. (Set to the state where there is no) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16), and if it is normal (step S16; Y).
, Power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) in which the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal
) (Step S17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step S19). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a legitimacy determining means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is legitimate when the power is turned on. When the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the probability set value is in the changed state (step S2).
1). When the probability setting value is changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set.

In the case of the probability set value change state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the RAM initialization process and the probability set value change state in which the probability set value can be changed are performed. Here, it is determined that the probability setting value is being changed when the power is cut off during the probability setting value change state and the RAM data is normally backed up. In this case, the probability setting is set again. The value is changed. If the probability setting value is not changed (step S21; N), the main body frame (step S21; N) starts from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier.
The front frame 12) determines whether it is in the open state (step S22).

In the storage area of the RAM 111C, an area for a probability setting value, an area for an initial value random number, an area for a variation pattern random number, an area for game control, and an area for displaying a state are set in order from the beginning. In the area for the probability setting value, a probability setting value area for storing the information of the currently set probability setting value and a work area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value are set. Will be done. This work area includes a work probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state, and an area for storing various flags. Further, in the area for the initial value random number, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number, which are updated at any time, are stored. Further, the variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 that are updated at any time are stored in the variable pattern random number area. Further, in the game control area, a work area and a stack area in which information (various data and programs) necessary for performing game control are stored are set. Further, in the work area for displaying the status, a work area for storing information necessary for displaying a base value, a bonus ratio, and the like, and a stack area are set.

The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired in the game area 32 and finished the game, and the number of payouts based on the winning in the winning area. The information to be calculated and required to display the base value includes, for example, information on the number of game balls detected by the outswitch and information on the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. In addition, the bonus ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the prize opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present, during the big hit state (that is, fanfare and ending). It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening (excluding the inside) (so-called continuous character ratio), and the information necessary to display the character ratio. Includes, for example, information about the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information about the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by character).

The RAM clear start address 2 is the start address of the area for the initial value random number, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the area for the variable pattern random number are performed. The area for game control will be cleared. The area for the initial value random number and the area for the fluctuation pattern random number may not be included in the clear target. Further, the RAM clear start address 1 described later is the start address of the area for the probability setting value, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number are performed. The area for, the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared. Further, the RAM clear start address 3 described later is the start address of the area for game control, and RA is set in this address.
By performing the process of clearing M, the area for game control is cleared.

The area for status display is initialized when the validity is judged in the status display edit output processing in the timer interrupt processing described later and it is abnormal, but the backed up information is not normal. In the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear start address 1 set in the case is set, the area for displaying the status may also be initialized. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the entire area of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

In the checksum calculation process of step S18 and step S57 described later, the checksum is calculated only for the work area for game control. In addition, one or a plurality of the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, the area for the game control, and the area for displaying the state may be targeted. When targeting multiple areas, the checksum of each area may be calculated individually and the validity may be judged individually, or the checksums of each area may be added up to determine the validity. It may be judged collectively.

When the main body frame is in the open state (step S22; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S23).
). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S23; Y), step S35
The process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed are performed. Further, when the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S23; N),
When the main body frame is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24, and it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the set value change switch is in the on state (step S24). do.

If the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S24; N), step S30.
And perform the processing when it recovers normally from the power failure. When the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41 to initialize the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area. Perform processing. That is, the setting value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 has data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. It is an initialization means to initialize.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (step S).
16; N or step S17; N), when it is determined that the checksums do not match (
Step S19; N) proceeds to step S25 to perform initialization processing of all RAM areas. That is, the RAM area for the probability setting value and the RAM area for the status display are initialized only when a RAM error occurs. Further, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control are not only when the set value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when a RAM abnormality occurs. Is also initialized.

First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (step S25), and the third read earlier.
From the state of the input port 124, it is determined whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S26). When the main body frame is in the open state (step S26; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S27). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed are performed. As will be described later, in steps S35 and S36, the RAM is initialized. In this case, the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so that the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number are used. Area, the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and the initial value is saved. The area for displaying the status may also be initialized here.

When the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S27; N) or the main body frame is not in the open state (step S26; N), a command (specific information) for instructing the setting change is issued to the effect control board (effect control device). It is transmitted to 300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and the power of the gaming machine is shut off. Staging control device 30
At 0, based on receiving the command of the setting change instruction, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board effect device 44, and the speaker 19a. , 19b outputs voice to notify the user to change the probability set value. This notification continues until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

In this case, if the power of the gaming machine is turned off, the front frame 12 is opened, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, and then the power is turned on again, the setting key is processed in step S27. It is determined that the switch is on (step S27; Y), and step S35.
The process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed are performed. When the control is stopped in step S29, the front frame 12 is not opened after the power of the gaming machine is turned off, or the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not turned to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the data in the RAM remains abnormal and the probability setting value cannot be changed to the changed state, so that the processes of steps S28 and S29 are performed again.

Although the notification is performed by transmitting the setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 in step S28, the game control device 100 may perform the notification. For example, the batch display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100 may be used for notification, and the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be used to perform a display that is not used as identification information. Alternatively, a display device for notifying the abnormality may be provided.

As a process when the power is normally restored from the power failure, in step S30 of FIG. 6, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The area to be initialized here is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is considered to be indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined. After that, the area in the RWM for storing the game state is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S31).

Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S31; N), steps S32 and S3
3 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S34. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S31; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is provided. On (lighting) data of is saved in the segment area (step S33).

Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the staging control board (staging control device 300) (step S34), and step S45. Proceed to. In the case of this embodiment, in step S34, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the screen designation. Send multiple commands such as commands (for example, a customer waiting demo command when waiting for customers, and a recovery screen command in other cases). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

The screen specification command sends a command according to the state of the restarted game. When resuming the special figure fluctuation display game that was interrupted due to the power cutoff due to the resumption of control, a recovery screen command that provides recovery information is transmitted as a screen specification command. Further, in this case, information regarding the result of the special figure variation display game to be restarted is also transmitted. In addition, when the power is cut off during the customer waiting state and the control is resumed in the customer waiting state due to the restoration of the power supply, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted as a screen specification command. Further, when resuming the special game state interrupted by power interruption due to the resumption of control, a special game state resumption command is transmitted as a screen designation command.

Further, in step S35 of FIG. 6, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 as the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed (step S).
35), the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S36).
Here, when the backed up information is normal and the game is migrated from step S21 or S23, the RAM clear start address 2 is set, so that the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the game control are used. The RAM area (work area and stack area) of is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the area for the probability setting value and the area for displaying the state are not initialized. However, it is not necessary to clear the area for the initial value random number and the area for the fluctuation pattern random number.

On the other hand, if the backed up information is abnormal and migrated from step S27, RA
Since the M clear start address 1 is set, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for the game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and initially. The value is saved. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting key operation unit). The area for displaying the status may also be initialized here.

Further, the area to be initialized is an area in which a value other than 0 is desired to be set among the areas cleared to 0, for example, a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. When all the RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value is set to 1 by setting 0 in the area for the probability setting value. By setting the probability setting value with the lowest probability,
Even if the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or fraudulent activity, the damage to the amusement store can be minimized. If a value other than 0 is set as the initial value, a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) can be set when the entire RAM area is initialized.

After that, the probability setting value changing flag is set as a process of setting the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed (step S37). As a result, the probability set value is changed. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). This makes it possible to display the information of the probability set value currently set in the probability set value display device 153.

Then, the value in the probability setting value area is loaded, saved in the work probability setting value area (step S39), and the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S40). , Step S45. The staging control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90 based on the reception of the command during the probability setting change.
LED light emission of frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46, operation of board effect device 44, speaker 19
Notification indicating that the probability set value is being changed is given by voice output by a and 19b. Although the RAM is initialized, the command at the time of RAM initialization is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. In addition, settings for outputting a security signal are also made. In this case, a timer may be set so that the security signal is output for a predetermined time, or the security signal may be continuously output during the period in which the probability set value is changed. Further, since the RAM has not been initialized yet, the setting for outputting the security signal may not be made.

Further, in step S41 of FIG. 6, RA is used as a process of initializing the RAM area for game control.
The M clear start address 2 is set (step S41), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S43). As a result, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. In addition, a timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the set value change button).

Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S44), and the process proceeds to step S45. In the case of this embodiment, in step S44,
Model specification command, special figure 1 hold number command, special figure 2 hold number command, probability information command,
Probability setting value information, which is information on the selected probability setting value, RAM initialization command (to display the customer waiting demo screen and notify RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Send multiple commands such as). Also, depending on the model,
In addition to these commands, the effect count information command and the high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

In step S45, the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) that generates the timer interrupt signal and the random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
Performs the process of starting the circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S45, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S46). Specifically, the setting of the code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111.
Performed by A. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on.
Various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit random number) ), Save in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of a random number (hit symbol random number) for determining a hit symbol of a normal figure (step S47), and then allow an interrupt (step S48).
In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S49) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number update process, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 update). Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special symbol variation display game, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special symbol variation display. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol of the game. Further, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the hit stop symbol of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuously incrementing the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process. It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not naturally exist in the model without the small hit. Also, depending on the model, there are some gaming machines that do not have a random number with the initial value of the winning symbol.

Further, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and hit symbol random number are processed by the program. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a unit. In addition, in the case of big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit symbol random numbers, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each random number may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

The number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus after the initial value random number update process in step S49.
Is set (step S50), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S5).
1). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the initial value random number update process (step S51; N)
Return to step S49). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S49) (step S48), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step S49, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process.
This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52).
.. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S5).
2; N) returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S53).
), The process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step S54) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S55).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S56).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S57) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S58), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step S59), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the start of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and a RAM 111C.
An initialization operation unit (setting value change button, setting key operation unit) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (game) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. The control device 100) is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

In the above main process, after the process of step S28 is performed, step S26
Steps S26 to S2 until the setting key switch is turned on.
The process of 8 may be repeated. That is, the control of the game may be stopped and the setting key switch may be turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made based on the current state of the third input port 124, not the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6. Further, step S2
If the state of repeating the processes of 6 to S28 continues for a certain period of time, step S2
You may move to 9 and wait for the power to be cut off.

Further, here, the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is that the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the on state.
The open state of the front frame 12 does not have to be a condition. Further, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition, or only the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition.

Further, it may be possible to shift to the probability setting value change state only on the condition that the setting value change switch is on without providing the setting key switch. That is, steps S22 and S
If the set value change switch is in the ON state in step S24 without performing the process of 23 (step S24; Y), the process may be performed to move to step S35 of FIG. In this case, the processing of steps S41 to S44 of FIG. 6 for initializing the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for the game control is not performed, but the setting is changed in the probability setting value change state. It is possible to initialize only the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for the game control by terminating without doing or setting the same probability setting value. By shifting to the probability set value change state only on the condition that the set value change switch is on, the configuration of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be diverted.

From the above, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game is executed based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and a special gaming state is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)).
A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the control means stores stored contents even when the power is cut off. The receivable storage means (RAM 111C) and the validity determination means (game control device 10) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is legitimate when the power is turned on.
0) and an initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability set value, and the storage means are stored in the storage means by the validity determination means. When it is determined that the information is not valid, the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state. Also, R
When the AM111C is initialized, the information of the probability set value set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set. It is possible to prevent the store from leaving the unintended probability setting value set.

Further, the control means is configured so that the probability set value can be selected when the operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage means is stored by the validity determination means. If it is determined that the value is not valid, the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value is continued until the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state due to the initialization.

Further, the control means stops the control of the game and waits for the selection of the probability set value when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not legitimate. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state due to the initialization.

Further, the game control means includes a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means. When the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not legitimate, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means uses the specific information. It means that the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value is performed based on the reception of. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state due to the initialization.

Further, when the effect control means receives the specific information, the staging control means continues the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value until the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state due to the initialization.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives the player a gaming value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit (setting value). The control means includes a setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (setting value change switch 151)).
A storage means (RAM111C) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is cut off is provided, and if the first operation unit and the second operation unit are not operated when the power is turned on, the storage means is based on the information stored in the storage means. If the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on after recovery, the probability setting value can be changed by the setting means, and only the second operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If so, it means that the storage means is initialized. Therefore, the work of changing the probability set value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, it is possible to perform an operation of selecting a probability set value and an operation of selecting initialization using the same operation unit, and it is possible to improve work efficiency in a game store. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

Further, the control means includes a legitimacy determining means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is legitimate when the power is turned on, and is stored in the storage means by the legitimacy determining means. When it is determined that the information is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, the notification prompting the initialization of the storage means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state.

Further, the control means is configured to be in a changeable state in which the probability set value can be changed by the setting means and to initialize the storage means when the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If it is determined by the validity determination means that the information stored in the storage means is not legitimate and the first operation unit is not operated, the first operation unit is operated. This means that a notification is given to prompt the user to turn on the power. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt processing is
The periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is CPU1.
It is started by inputting to 11A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S1).
01). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches, signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for controlling the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, normal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. Generated within the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready to launch.

Next, the random number update process 1 (step S10) for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process.
5) Random number update process 2 (step S106) for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is performed. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a in the normal figure, and the winning port switch 3
5a, Winning slot switch / status monitoring process (step) that monitors whether there is a normal signal input from the large winning slot switch 38a and monitors errors (whether the front frame or glass frame is open, etc.) S107) is performed.

Next, the probability setting value change process (step S1) for performing the process related to the change and confirmation of the probability set value.
08) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the probability set value is in the changed state (step S109). When the probability setting value is being changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value is not changed (step S109; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S110). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When the mode is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; N), as a process related to the progress of the game, a payout command transmission process (step S111) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, special The special figure game process (step S112) for performing the process related to the figure variation display game and the normal figure game process (step S113) for performing the process related to the normal figure variation display game are performed. On the other hand, when the probability setting value is changed (step S).
109; Y) or in the case of the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process proceeds to step S114 without performing the above processing related to the game. That is, in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the game cannot be advanced.

In the case of the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the payout command transmission process (step S111), the special figure game process (step S112), and the normal figure game process (step S113) should not be performed. However, you may do it for one or more of these. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed so that the prize balls are paid out. Further, a process other than the above-mentioned process may be included as a process that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, in the probability setting value change state, the random number update process 1 (step S105) or the random number update process 2 (step S10).
6) may be omitted, and the random number may not be updated in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. Further, the type of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S114), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115) that checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and the panel radio wave error that checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. Monitoring process (step S1
16). Then, an external information editing process (step S117) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and a base value is obtained from the number of game balls detected by the out switch and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. The status display edit output process is performed (step S118), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is also a gaming machine that needs to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, in the output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 that outputs the data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c is synthesized and output (step S142).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
The output data of the digit line of is acquired (step S144). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (for example, "door / frame opening" data, "security signal" data) is digitized / external information output port. 136
Is output to (step S146).

After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S148). As a result, a plurality of light emitting display units provided in the batch display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S149), and the combined data (
For example, "big hit signal 1" data, "big hit signal 2" data, "big hit signal 3" data, "big hit signal 4" data, "design fixed number signal" data, "starting port signal" data. , Data of "main prize ball signal") and output data of launch permission (step S1
50), the synthesized data is output to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / emission permission signal (step S151).

Next, the off-output data of the probability setting value display is set as the display content in the probability setting value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability setting value display permission flag is the probability setting value display device 15.
It is a flag set when the display regarding the probability setting value is permitted to 3.

When this probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y),
The probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (step S154), and the probability setting value display data is loaded.
The display data is output to the output port 134 for displaying the probability set value (step S155). As a result, the probability set value display device 153 is displayed regarding the probability set value. On the other hand, when the probability set value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the output port 134 of the probability set value display (step S155). In this case, the off-output data set in step S152 is set, and the probability set value display device 15
Nothing is displayed in 3.

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S156). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S157).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S158). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S159). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S160).

Next, the test signal output data of the probability set value is loaded (step S161). Here, the probability set value display data is loaded as the test signal output data from the probability set value display data area. That is, as for the information regarding the probability set value among the test signals to the test firing device, the display data of the probability set value display device 153 is used as it is. This simplifies the processing and makes it possible to output accurate information without changing the information of the probability set value. Of course, the data for display may be converted into value information and output.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S162), and if it is not in the ON state (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. Further, in the case of the on state (step S162; Y), the loaded data and the setting key switch on information are combined (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. After that, the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device (step S164), and the output process is completed.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize ball, and the prize has not yet been sent. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter that can store information regarding the prize ball command.

The prize number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). The winning data corresponding to the prize balls that are used and have not been processed to generate the main prize ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter that can store information about the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals,
It is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas has a prize number counter area for each prize ball set for each prize opening (in the case of this embodiment, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is added by 1 based on the winning to the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated to a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, and more untransmitted. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the three prize ball counter areas of the winning number counter area 1 and 10
Up to 65535 prizes can be stored in the individual prize ball counter area and the 14 prize ball counter area, respectively, and the 3 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area. Each of the ball counter areas is configured to store up to 255 prizes.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, "0" is set in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count count. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. Determination (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. on the other hand,
If it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), step S
Return to 181 and repeat the above process. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184).
, Acquire the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S18).
5). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S187). As the value of the prize ball remaining number area before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), step S.
It shifts to the process of 192. When it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value in the main prize ball signal output frequency region is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S191), and step S18.
Return to the process of 8. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in connection with the winning of the game ball to a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accuracy generated during the big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processes of steps S181 to S191 are processes for updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the processes of steps S192 to S201 are processes for transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S1).
93). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. When the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control, and if the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is in the on state (busy state). Will be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

When the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, instead of transmitting the payout command for each timer interrupt, a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. It is configured to send a payout command when it is in a state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not send the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

The conditions for the payout busy signal to be on (busy state) are, for example, during the payout operation, ball lending operation, shoot ball out error, overflow error, frame radio wave fraud, and payout ball detection switch (payout). Counting the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (number of unpaid prize balls = remaining number of acquired game balls) during an abnormality (switch for monitoring the balls), an error of insufficient payout, an error of overpayment ) Is present (when it is not 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). Number of winnings counter area 1
In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in (step S195), there is a count number other than "0" in the prize number counter area to be checked among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number. Is determined.

Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the prize number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the prize number counter areas is completed. Determination (step S197). With this judgment,
When it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198).
, Acquire the payout number command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 msec is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control can start the payout control. If so, it serves as a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

Since the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200 in this way, the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winning that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure and is backed up by the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be achieved without having the function to do so.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine of JP-A-2000-321759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data to its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, conventional gaming machines require a backup function, so
There was a problem that it led to cost increase. According to the present invention, it is possible to realize accurate payout control even if the payout control device 200 does not have a function for backing up.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the prize ball is paid out by an external device such as a hall computer. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter that can store the information about the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter that can store the information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball with different transmission timings are provided. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

Based on the above, the game is controlled comprehensively, and the winning area provided in the game area 32 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38).
A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the player, and a payout control means that controls the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. (Payout control device 200), and the game control means is a prize ball based on a state signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. Control is performed to send a command to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and the power failure is restored, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means, the command is immediately output. The prize ball command is issued in response to the continuous output of the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means without transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means. It means that it is transmitted to the control means.

Further, in the game area 32, a winning area having a different number of prize balls (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 3)
7. A plurality of general winning openings 35 and special variable winning devices 38) are provided, and the game control means (game control device 100) has not yet transmitted a prize ball command instructing payout control of game balls for each number of prize balls. When the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying the above is provided, the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the status signal is not transmitted to each prize ball command counter to specify whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. It means that it is done before specifying whether or not there is a prize ball command.

In addition to comprehensively controlling the game, a prize ball command is issued based on the winning of the game ball to a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38). (Game control device 100), a payout control means (payout control device 200) that controls payout of game balls based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means, and
The game control means is provided with a prize ball when the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting a command to a payout control means, and a prize ball signal (main) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area. External information output means (game control device 100) that outputs a prize ball signal) to the outside of the game machine.
The external information output means outputs the prize ball signal regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. It becomes.

Further, even if the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) indicates that the status signal can start the payout control when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can store information about the prize ball command and a prize that can store information about the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variation). A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the prize device 38), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the one prize ball command is issued by the payout control means (
It is configured to transmit to the payout control device 200), and is configured to be a prize ball command counter (game control device 10).
In 0), the information of the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, and the information is updated when the game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, and the prize ball command to the payout control means is performed. By updating in correspondence with the transmission to, the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored, and the external information output means is decided to be paid out when the game ball is won in the predetermined winning area. The number of prize balls is accumulated, and each time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number, the prize ball signal is output to the outside of the game machine. The information of the prize can be stored, and it is updated when the game ball is won in the predetermined prize area, and it is updated in correspondence with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, so that the cumulative processing is still performed. It will be possible to memorize the number of prize balls that have not been played.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 1 game ball.
It is configured so that the main prize ball signal is output every time the number becomes zero.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the number of main prize ball number signal outputs by +1 for every 10 payout schedules (every time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process).
Then, the main prize ball signal is output for the number of times of the updated (set) output.
With respect to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually made, so that the schedule and the result can be matched. It is possible to deal with fraudulent payouts. In addition, even if a prize is won during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to the ball running out, etc., and even if the payout is made after the big hit ends, the hall control (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judgment).

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 10 shows the winning port switch / status monitoring process (step S1) in the timer interrupt process.
07) is shown. In this winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is in the changed state (step S299). When the probability setting value is being changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value is not changed (step S299; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S).
300). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When the mode is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300; N), the processes after step S301 are performed as the processes related to the progress of the game. On the other hand, when the probability setting value is changed (
In the case of step S299; Y) or the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. That is, in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot proceed without processing related to winning.

In the case of the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the special variable winning device 38 is monitored for fraud and winning, the normal dynamic winning device 37 is monitored for fraud and winning, and the winning slot is always available for winning. We have decided not to monitor the winnings, but you may do so for one or more of these. For example, fraudulent monitoring of the special variable winning device 38 and the ordinary variable winning device 37 may be performed. Further, a process other than the above-mentioned process may be included as a process that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed. Further, the type of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

In step S301, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the large winning opening is large even though the large winning opening is not open. The fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the winning opening and detecting a normal winning is executed.

In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input in the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area,
Information on the illegal winning error notification command, the upper limit of the number of illegal winnings (number of illegal winning judgments), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. In addition, the winning table in the winning opening monitoring table shows the number of times monitoring is repeated (the number of switches).
In addition, information on the monitoring switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the lower address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined for each switch. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning opening device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the large winning opening is not open even though the large winning opening is not open. Fraud & detect normal prizes while monitoring for fraudulent prizes in the mouth
The winning monitoring process (step S304) is executed.

Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the Fuden (step S305), and monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the Fuden even though the Fuden is not open. At the same time, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S306) for detecting a normal winning is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for a winning opening switch (for example, a winning opening switch 36a of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and a winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that can always win a prize is prepared (step S30).
7) Perform the winning number counter update process (step S308) to update the winning number.

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches for monitoring the status and the signal to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 1, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. The state monitoring based on one signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", the state monitoring based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is "2", status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is "3", status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. To.

Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the game machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is "0", the glass frame open detection switch 63
Status monitoring is set based on the signal output from, and the status scan counter value is "1".
In the case of, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the frame radio wave invalid signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314), and if the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315).
), Game machine status check process to determine the status such as whether an error has occurred (step S)
316) is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 3, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. 2 Signal-based condition monitoring is set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

After that, the payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. Since the processes of steps S315 to S317 are executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", they are executed once for every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

[Probability setting value change processing]
FIG. 11 shows a probability setting value change process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this probability setting value change process, first, it is determined whether the probability setting value is changed (step S401), and if it is not the probability setting value change state (step S401; N), the probability setting value can be confirmed. The probability set value confirmation process is performed (step S422), and the probability set value change process is terminated.

Further, in the case of the probability setting value change state (step S401; Y), if the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0, the probability setting value extinguishing timer is updated by -1 (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0. .. When the probability set value extinguishing timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405.
In this case, the probability set value information is displayed on the probability set value display device 153 by the output process (see FIG. 8) described above. Further, when the probability set value extinguishing timer is not 0 (step S403;
N) proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, and nothing is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the output processing described above.

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability set value has been changed (step S405). The probability setting value changed is a state in which the probability setting value used in the game is newly set by performing the confirmation operation described later, and in this case, the probability setting value changed flag is set. If the probability set value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability set value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406).

Then, in the determination of whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether or not the input state from the set value change switch has changed to the on state. That is, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value change button is pressed. When there is no input from the setting value change switch (
Step S406; N) proceeds to step S411.

Further, when there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406; Y), the value in the working probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5. The values of 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to the settings 1 to 6, respectively, and the value of the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 each time the setting value change button is pressed. , The selected probability setting value will change sequentially. In addition, when the value of the working probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the state of 5, it returns to 0. Further, at this stage, only the value of the probability setting value area for work is changed, and the value of the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value used for the game does not change. The probability setting value selected based on the confirmation operation described later is saved in the probability setting value area. Further, although the number of probability setting values is set to 6 here, it is possible to set the number to any other value.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S408). As a result, the data displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 becomes the information of the newly selected probability setting value. Then, the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability set value extinguishing timer area (step S409), and the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). As a result, as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the setting value change button, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is turned off and a blank display is performed in which nothing is displayed, and then new probability setting value information is displayed. Will be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated.

Here, a blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as a specific display, but other displays may be used. For example, when displaying the probability setting value with a number from 1 to 6,
A display other than this number may be used as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display that is not used as a display of the probability set value. Further, when the display of the probability setting value is displayed in a continuous lighting state, the display of the updated probability setting value may be blinked as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display mode different from the display mode after the lapse of the specific display. Examples of the display mode used as the specific display include a display mode in which blinking is performed, a display mode in which the blinking cycle is different from that in the non-specific display, and a display mode in which the display color is different from that in the non-specific display. ..

Further, information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the operation of the setting value change button, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the light emission of the LED.
Specific notification, which is a notification that the selected probability setting value has been changed, may be performed by the operation of the board effect device 44, the output of voice by the speakers 19a, 19b, and the like. That is,
Specific notification may be performed in combination with the specific display or in place of the specific display. Further, the display device 41, the special figure 1 display device 51, and the special figure 2 display device may be displayed in the same manner as the probability set value display device 153.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (
Step S411). The touch switch is a sensor that can detect the contact of the human body with the operation handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is contact. When there is no input from this touch switch (step S411; N), the probability setting value change process ends. When there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value in the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S412). This will result in
The selected probability setting value is set as the probability setting value used for the game. That is, touching the operation handle 24 is a confirmation operation for determining the selected probability setting value. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be a confirmation operation, and an operation unit for the confirmation operation may be provided in the setting means.

After that, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S413). Next, the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S415), the command for changing the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S416), and the probability setting value change process is completed. .. In the staging control device 300, the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90 are based on receiving the command for changing the probability set value.
, The LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 emits light, the operation of the board effect device 44, the sound output by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like, to notify that the probability set value has been changed.

On the other hand, when the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). If the setting key switch is not off (
Step S416; N), that is, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position, the probability setting value change process is terminated. Further, when the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, the RAM
The clear start address 3 is set (step S417), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S418).
Step S419).

As a result, the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control is cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. In addition, a timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for displaying the state are not initialized. However, the area for the initial value random number and the area for the fluctuation pattern random number may be cleared. In addition, the area related to the change work, such as the probability setting value area for work that temporarily stores the information of the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state and various flags in the area for the probability setting value, is cleared. To. Therefore, since the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared, the display on the probability setting value display device 153 ends. In addition, since the flag for changing the probability setting value is cleared, the probability setting value change state ends.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S420), and the command for completing the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (the effect control device 300). Step S421), the process proceeds to step S48 of the main process shown in FIG. The staging control device 300 is based on receiving a command for changing the probability set value.
Display of display device 41 and sub information display device 90, LED of frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46
Due to the light emission of the panel, the operation of the board staging device 44, the output of sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
Notifies that the change of the probability set value is completed. This notification also serves as a notification that the RAM has been initialized.

In the case of the present embodiment, in step S421, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the probability setting A plurality of commands such as a command for ending the change (a command for displaying a customer waiting demo screen and notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The command for ending the probability setting change may be a RAM initialization command. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

From the above, the game is executed on the basis of the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played on a game machine capable of generating a special game state in which the player is given a game value. Probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery are assigned are set to multiple types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). The setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from the above is provided, and the setting means includes a display unit (probability setting value display device 153) that displays information on the selected probability setting value, based on the operation of the operation unit. When the display of the display unit is updated with the selection operation of the probability set value, the specific display is performed for a certain period from the update. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

In addition, the setting means is configured to display a display that is not used as a display of information on the probability set value as a specific display. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

In addition, the setting means is configured to display the updated information for a certain period in a manner different from that after the lapse of the certain period as a specific display. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
FIG. 12 shows the probability set value confirmation process (step S422) in the probability set value change process. In this probability setting value confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect (step S431). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed. In the case of this probability setting value confirmation mode, it can be determined from the fact that the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is set.

When the mode is not the probability set value confirmation mode (step S431; N), the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, a state in which nothing is displayed is set as the display of the probability setting value display device 153. After that, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S).
433).

The term “during the game” means that the game is being executed, the special map variation display game is being executed, the normal map variation display game is being executed, the special game state is being played, or the normal map variation display game is being executed, or the normal map is being hit. If the game is in progress (step S433; Y), the probability set value confirmation process ends. That is, when the game is in progress, the mode does not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. In this case, information indicating that the mode cannot shift to the probability set value confirmation mode because the game is being played may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 to notify the effect.

The conditions for determining that the game is in progress are not limited to those described above. One or more states selected from the running of the special figure variation display game, the execution of the normal figure variation display game, the special game state, and the hit state of the normal figure may be a condition, for example, the special figure. It may be said that the game is being played when it corresponds to either during the execution of the variable display game or during the special gaming state. again,
Conditions other than the above may be added. For example, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be considered that the game is in progress and the mode may not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode.

If the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S434). If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S434; N), the probability setting value confirmation process ends. When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S434; Y), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set (step S435), and the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S436).
As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started, and the information of the probability setting value currently set as the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is displayed.

After that, the initial value is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S437).
The command under confirmation of the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S438), and the probability set value confirmation process is completed. When the probability set value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output as external information for a predetermined time. Further, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and produces a board effect based on receiving the command during the probability setting value confirmation. The operation of the device 44, the output of voice by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like are used to notify that the probability set value is being confirmed.

On the other hand, when the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process ends. in this case,
The probability setting value confirmation mode continues.

When the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S439; N), the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is cleared (step S440), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends, and a state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is set. Then, a command to end the probability setting value confirmation is transmitted to the staging control board (staging control device 300) (step S442).
, Ends the probability setting value confirmation process. The effect control device 300 ends the notification that the probability set value is being confirmed based on the command of the probability set value confirmation end.

That is, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position while the power is turned on, and ends by returning from the second position. When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value is changed.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game processing, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 3
Monitor the input of 7a, control the entire process related to the special figure variation display game, and set the special figure display.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 3 forming the second starting winning opening 3
If there is a prize in the game ball in 7, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and the game result based on the prize is determined in advance before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the prize. Make a judgment.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning opening device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). The value of the special figure game processing timer is "
When it is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is registered. (Step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and the effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change are in progress. A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A
9) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. Special figure display processing (step A10) that sets the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, sets the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing, and so on.
)I do.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step A12) for setting the information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged and the big hit end processing are performed. Large winning opening residual ball processing (step A13) for setting information necessary for the game
I do.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the big hit end processing (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special drawing normal processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit middle processing. The small hit fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like.
16).
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end processing are performed. The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end processing (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special drawing normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A).
19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) related to the control of the variation of the special symbol by the special diagram 1 display 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) related to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. , End the special figure game processing. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and subsequent processing is performed. conduct.

The small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the first start port (start winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to perform the first step. 1 It is determined whether or not there is a prize in the starting port (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no prize in the first starting port (step A103).
In N), the process proceeds to the process of step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize for the first starting port (step A).
In 103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is shortened (during normal power support) (step A).
104).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special time reduction is not in progress (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special time is being shortened (step A104;
In Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) for transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 is performed. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the first starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and to perform a notification (warning) instructing the effect control device 300 to perform a right-handed instruction.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A1).
09), a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a prize in the second starting port (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no prize in the second starting port (step A111).
; N) ends the start port switch monitoring process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the second starting port (step A).
At 111; Y), an ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is,
When it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state where it is possible to win a prize (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y). , The process proceeds to the process of step A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, step A
If it is determined in 112 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step A113).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or fraud has occurred.
If there is a winning game ball in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal winnings.
Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

When it is determined in step A113 that the electric power fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A114), the special feature. Figure Start port switch common processing (step A115) is performed,
The start port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, if it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power generation is occurring (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process.
, A110) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 15, in the hard random number acquisition process,
First, of the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37)
Set the non-winning information of the start port to be monitored (step A121), and start port 1 switch 3
It is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored among 6a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124). ..

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125).
). Then, among the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), the winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed. finish.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the special figure start port switch common processing, first, the start port 1 switch 36
Of a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the number of times the start port signal is output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded (step). A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step A133). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of output times overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step A135). When the number of special figures to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N)
) Ends the special figure start port switch common processing.

If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 (step A135; Y). Step A13
6), save the target start opening winning flag (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hard random number acquisition process is stored in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A14).
2).
When it is determined in step A142 that the prize is not given to the first starting port (step A142).
In N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A142 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A).
In 142; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (step A143), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A144).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, a start port switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), and an effect command setting process (step A148) is performed.
Special figure Start port switch common processing is completed.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and is the starting right to execute the variable display game. It serves as a starting storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of memories. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting storage up to a predetermined number. Various random value values memorized and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) are stored.
It is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the special figure hold information determination process (step A14) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process.
The details of 6) will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 17, first, the start opening winning flag saved in step A137 of the special drawing start opening switch common process is checked, and it is determined whether or not the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize. (Step A151).
When it is determined in step A151 that the prize is not given to the first starting port (step A151).
In N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A151 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A).
In 151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time reduction is in progress (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special time is not shortened (step A152;
In N), it is determined whether a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A153).
When it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A1).
53; Y) ends the special figure reservation information determination process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is not in progress or the small hit is not occurring (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot determination process (step A154) is performed. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A156), and in step A140 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the player has won the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
When it is determined in step A158 that the prize is not given to the first starting port (step A158).
In (N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step A163), and step A164
Move to the processing of.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A158 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A).
In 158; Y), a small hit determination process (step A159) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the large hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A).
163), the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the small hit symbol prepared in step A143 of the special figure start port switch common process is set. Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the random number (step A1)
62), the process proceeds to step A164.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A165). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step). A167).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A169), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

The big hit determination process in step A157 and the small hit determination process in step A159 are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 which are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process. That is, the determination is made according to the set probability setting value. Further, the special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special map normal processing.

Through the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command containing the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (the game control device 100).
For example, it is determined whether or not it will be a special result). It should be noted that the time to determine the random value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is "0" (step A305). Then, the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" (step A3).
If it is determined as 05; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A309).
If the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A309; N), the customer waiting demo flag area is set to the customer waiting demo flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and an effect command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316).
), Special figure Ends normal processing. That is, when the special figure variation display game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied, the customer waiting demo command that forms the standby information is output to the effect control device 300.
It means that it is sent to.
On the other hand, when the customer waiting demo has already started in step A309 (step A309;
Y) shifts to the process of step A313 without performing the process of steps A310 to A312.

Further, in step A301, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is not "0" (step A301;
N) prepares a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (step A302).
). Next, the effect command setting process (step A303) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A303) is performed.
Step A304) is performed to end the special drawing normal processing.
Further, in step A305, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0" (step A305;
N) prepares a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (step A306).
). Next, the effect command setting process (step A307) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed.
Step A308) is performed to end the special drawing normal processing.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the check of the special figure 1 hold number, if the special figure 2 hold number is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 19A, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A321).
The jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a big hit is set with deviation information and jackpot information, and whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a small hit is determined. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting the missed hit flag and the small hit information is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information).
After performing 323), the special figure information setting process (step A324) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and various various settings related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game are performed. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step A325). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the processing during the special figure change is set as the processing number (step A328).
, The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and the signal related to the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display 5) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area.
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of 1 (step A33).
3). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 19A is performed in the second start. It is intended for memory.

As shown in FIG. 19B, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341), and the second
The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting the missed hit flag 2 and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information).
After performing 343), the special figure information setting process (step A344) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and various various settings related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the processing during the special figure change is set as the processing number (step A348).
, The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 display 5) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area.
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of 2 (step A35).
3). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is terminated.

In addition, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. This makes it possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value, such as selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the probability set value or making the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern different according to the probability set value.

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
) And the details of the jackpot determination process performed in the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20, in this jackpot determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A381). The upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability set value, and the upper limit judgment value in the high probability state and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability state (normal probability state) are defined respectively. Here, the corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value. The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability set value, the jackpot judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A382), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state).
The lower limit judgment value may be different depending on the probability setting value and the probability state. In this case, as with the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. To set. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be collectively used as a judgment value table.

When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A383; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A389), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss in step A389 means that it is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that it is determined as a small hit in a later small hit determination process. If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A3).
83; N) determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (step A384). Then, in the case of a high probability state (step A384; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is acquired (step A).
385), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A38).
7). Further, in the case of not in the high probability state (step A384; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A386), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387). .. The upper limit determination value to be acquired here is acquired with reference to the upper limit determination value table set in step A381 described above.

When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A358), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A389), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
) And the small hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 21, in this small hit determination process, first, the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A401). The small hit upper limit determination value is set for each probability set value. Moreover, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether or not it is in a high probability state. Further, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value in the same probability set value do not overlap. The range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value between different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value, the small hit determination can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402).
). Here, the value of the small hit lower limit determination value is the same even if the probability setting value is different. When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A404), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A404), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A405), and the small hit determination process is completed. do.

As in the case of the big hit judgment, the small hit upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability set value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit judgment value may be acquired from the set upper limit judgment value table. , The upper limit judgment value in the big hit judgment and the small hit upper limit judgment value in the small hit judgment may be collectively specified in the judgment value table provided for each probability set value. Further, although the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if it is a different probability setting value, the small hit lower limit judgment value may be different depending on the probability setting value. In this case, it depends on the probability setting value. And select the lower limit judgment value for small hits.

Further, the process of setting the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381).
Or, in the process of setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401), if the value indicating the referenced probability setting value is an abnormal value such as not corresponding to any probability setting value, The setting may be made assuming that it is a predetermined probability setting value (for example, setting 1), or the game may be stopped and an error notification may be performed when an abnormality occurs. In addition, although the probability setting value is referred to for each judgment of big hit and each judgment of small hit, the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the set probability setting value when the probability setting value is set in the probability setting value change state. Or, a process of setting a small hit upper limit determination value may be performed, and this may only be referred to when determining a large hit or when determining a small hit.

[Processing during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure change processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the change symbol discrimination flag (special figure 1 change flag or special figure 2 change flag) is prepared (step A).
601), the effect command setting process is performed (step A602). That is, the symbol stop command forming the stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed ends and the result is derived and displayed. In the staging control device 300,
Upon receiving this symbol stop command, the variation display of the decorative special symbol variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is stopped and the result is stopped and displayed.

After that, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, the display time is set to 600 msec regardless of whether the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, or a small hit symbol pattern, but the display time may be different depending on the stop symbol pattern. .. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Next, the processing number "2" related to the processing during display of the special figure is set as the processing number (step A6).
05), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606).

Next, the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol) is saved. 2 Save the fluctuating signal (OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A608), and set the symbol for the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal. Save the value (eg 256 ms) (step A609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A610). ), As information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A611), the processing during the special figure change is terminated.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM The process of clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process are loaded. (Step A703), the process of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (step A704) is performed. Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705), and it is a jackpot (step A70).
5; If it is determined to be Y), a test signal relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on,
(Turn on the signal per special symbol 2) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A705; N) as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A705; N).
If it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (step A706; Y), a test signal (for example, a signal during operation of the condition device is turned on, an accessory) relating to the start of the jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) of the first special figure variation display game is turned on. Turn on the signal during operation of the continuous operation device, turn on the signal per special symbol) RW
The process of saving in the test signal output data area of M (step A707) and setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. The number of rounds is saved in the upper limit area of (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round LE of the RWM is acquired.
Save in the D pointer area (step A711).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A71) is performed.
3) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information in which the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.
The fanfare command corresponding to (step A716) is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A717) is performed. This fanfare command forms the special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of this embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is O when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1).
N, a big hit with no balls (so-called sudden big hit, etc. The big winning opening opening information is the big winning opening opening information 1
), It is ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it is OFF in other cases.
Further, the big hit 3 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball, and is OFF when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 470) corresponding to the state of the probability that the winning result will be obtained in the big winning opening opening information and the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game.
0msec, 7700msec or 300msec) is set (step A719), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720).
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the large winning opening large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared. Save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A72)
3). After that, fanfare / fanfare for shifting to inter-interval processing /
Interval processing Transition setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, a special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variation winning device 38 into an open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It is a means for generating a special game state that generates a state.

On the other hand, in step A706, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A706).
N) determines whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A72).
5; Y) is a high-probability fluctuation count update process (step) for updating the value (high-probability fluctuation count) of the high-probability fluctuation count region for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high-probability state. A
726), Staging mode information check processing related to setting the staging mode (step A727)
To determine whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state (step A).
728).

When it is determined in step A728 that the probability of the special figure is not high (step A728; N).
In), load the decoration special drawing command from the decoration special drawing command area and prepare (step A).
729), the effect command setting process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), and an effect command setting process (step A73) is prepared.
2) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733. This small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Further, when it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is in high probability (step A72).
8; Y) proceeds to the process of step A733. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment
At 0, when the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening opens due to the occurrence of a small hit, but in order to prevent the player from being aware of the occurrence of a small hit. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, "7" related to the small hit fanfare processing is set as the processing number (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A736), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is output as ON (big hit + small hit)). )) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A)
737), a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the area for the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step A739), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A740).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (turning on the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A742), and the process of displaying the special figure is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high-probability state. High probability fluctuation number update process (step A743) for updating the area value (high probability fluctuation number), effect mode information check process (step A7) for setting the effect mode.
44) is performed, and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A7).
45), it is determined whether the remaining rotation speed of the effect and the remaining rotation speed of the switching preparation match (step A7).
46). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotational speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes, or the same value in any of the plurality of production modes. It may be (rotational speed), or it may be the same value (rotational speed) in all the staging modes among the plurality of staging modes.
If it is determined in step A746 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step A746; N), "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A747). ), The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A750), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A751). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A752).
), Ends the process while displaying the special figure.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A746 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation match (step A746; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the effect command is set. After performing the process (step A748), the process proceeds to the process of step A749. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several times before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is produced across modes. It is possible to prevent inconsistencies and the like.

[Public game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (step S113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the Fuzu game process, first, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the Fuden winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. Perform the monitoring process (step B2). Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been timed up, it is referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. The process of setting the normal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal figure game process number (step B6) is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the normal figure game processing number (step B7).

If the normal map game processing number is "0" in step B7, the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the normal map fluctuation are in progress. Performs normal processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for processing.
Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display processing is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal power release time is set according to whether or not the time is shortened. In addition, the normal map display processing (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map hitting process is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "3", the normal figure hitting process is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing is set. The process (step B11) is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per end processing is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "5", the normal figure per end process (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process (step) related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53. Perform B15) to end the normal map game processing.
On the other hand, in step B4, the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4;
N), that is, when it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to the process of step B14, and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is “0” (step B301), and when the normal figure holding number is “0” (step B301; Y). )
Sets "0" for the normal processing of the normal figure as the processing number (step B322), and saves the processing number in the normal drawing game processing number area (step B323). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the normal processing of the normal map is terminated.

If the number of reserved figures is not "0" (step B301; N), a random number is loaded from the hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the RWM. The loaded area, that is, the hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) are cleared to 0 (step B302), and the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game is It is determined whether the normal probability (that is, the low probability of the normal figure) is higher than the high probability of the normal figure, that is, the time is shortened (step B303).

When the normal probability is not high (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the low probability of the normal figure is set (step B304), and when the normal high probability is in progress (step B).
303; Y) sets the lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at the time of high probability in the normal figure (step B305).
After that, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (step B306), and if the value of the hit random number is not equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (step B306; N), the value of the hit random number is step B304 or B305. It is determined whether the value is less than the lower limit determination value set in (Step B).
307).

When the value of the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306; Y), or when the value of the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in steps B304 or B305 (step B3).
07; Y) saves the loss information in the hit flag area (step B308), sets the loss stop symbol number (step B309), and saves the loss symbol information in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B310). , The stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B).
311), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the hit symbol random number loaded in step B302 is set (step B312), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B313). ), The stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314).

In the case of this embodiment, the probability of hit at the time of low probability of normal map is 0/251, the probability of hit at the time of high probability of normal map is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is "251", and the lower probability judgment value is low probability. "251", the high probability lower limit determination value is "1". Therefore, when the probability is low, the value of the hit random number will be different in all cases of "0" to "250". Further, at the time of high probability in the normal figure, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of "1" to "250" is a hit, and the case where the value of the hit random number is "0" is out of the question.
Further, in the case of this embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), and the free area after the shift is set to 0.
Clear (step B317) and update the number of reserved figures by -1 (step B318). That is, a process of moving up the ranks of the number of reserved numbers 2 to 4 held after the number of reserved numbers 1 by one as the game for displaying the fluctuation of the number of normal figures related to the oldest number of reserved numbers 1 is executed. I do. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 in the random number storage area for the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done.
Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation time is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B3).
20). Then, the normal map changing process transition setting process (step B321) for shifting to the normal map changing process is performed, and the normal map normal process is terminated. That is, the game execution means by which the game control device 100 executes the normal map variation display game as the variable display game (based on the normal map start memory) based on the detection of the game ball at the normal map start gate 34 (inflow region). Make a play.
In the case of the present embodiment, in step B320, the fluctuation time is set to 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. ..

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the normal map changing process, first, the process number is set to "2" related to the normal map display process (step B401), and the process number is saved in the normal map game process number area. (Step B402). After that, the normal map display time (for example, 600 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal map fluctuation display game on the normal map display 53, is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B403), and the fluctuation of the normal map ends. The signal (for example, the signal during fluctuation of the normal symbol 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B404), and the signal is saved.
The stop flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (step B405), and the normal map fluctuation processing is terminated.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), "0" related to the normal processing of the normal figure is set as the processing number (step B515), and the processing number is saved in the normal drawing game processing number area (step). B516). After that, the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the process of displaying the normal map is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information (for example, "0"). Or "5") and save it in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B505). Next, the value of the hit end pointer corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information (
For example, "4" or "7") is acquired and saved in the end pointer area per normal figure (step B506). Next, the normal power opening time corresponding to the normal map stop symbol information (for example, 1700 m)
Acquires seconds or 2600 msec) and saves it in the normal map game processing timer area (step B5).
07).

Next, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the processing during normal drawing (step B).
508), the processing number is saved in the normal figure game processing number area (step B509).
After that, a signal relating to the start of hitting the solenoid fluctuation display game (for example, turning on the signal during operation of the normal symbol 1) and a signal relating to the start of operating the solenoid (for example, turning on the signal during operation of the solenoid electric accessory 1) are set as test signals. The on-data is saved in the output data area of the solenoid solenoid (step B511) in order to save the data in the output data area (step B510) and output the signal for driving (on) the solenoid solenoid.

Further, the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B512), and the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. Clear the information in the illegal winning number area (step B513). Then, a flag (a flag outside the fraud monitoring period) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the processing during display of the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the normal drawing hitting process, first, the normal drawing hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal drawing hitting control pointer is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. (Step B602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step B602; N).
) Updates the per-figure control pointer by +1 (step B603), and performs branch processing according to the value of the per-figure control pointer (the value before the +1 update in step B603) (step B604).
Further, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B602; Y).
Does not perform the process of updating the per-figure control pointer area by +1 in step B603, but performs the branch process according to the value of the per-figure control pointer (step B604).

When the value of the control pointer is "0", "2" or "5", the process proceeds to step B605 to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The wait time after the 37 is closed is saved in the normal-figure game processing timer area (step B605), and the off-data is saved in the normal electric solenoid output data area (step B606) in order to turn off the normal electric solenoid 37c. End the process during drawing.

If the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B607 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is used. The opening time is saved in the normal power opening time in the normal power game processing timer area (step B607), and the on-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (step B608). Ends the process during normal operation.

If the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B609 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled.
Save the opening time of the normal power, which is the opening time of the game, in the game processing timer area of the normal figure (step B60).
9) In order to turn on the Fuden solenoid 37c, the on-data is saved in the Fuden solenoid output data area (step B610), and the processing during the normal drawing is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611, the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated, and the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed. Is set to "4" (step B611). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B612), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B613). After that, in order to turn off the solenoid solenoid 37c, the off-data is saved in the output data area of the solenoid solenoid (step B614), and the process of hitting the drawing is completed.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, in step B605, the wait time is 300 m.
Seconds are 1700 msec as the normal power opening time in step B607, 2600 msec as the normal power opening time in step B609, and 6 as the normal power remaining ball processing time in step B613.
Save 00ms.
Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 28, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing during display of the normal map, "1700 ms" is acquired as the normal power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, the normal power release time is "1700 msec", so that the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then, since the control pointer is "0", the wait time is 300 msec. The time is set, and then the control pointer for hitting the normal map is updated to "1", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer for hitting the normal map is set to "2".
Since the wait time is set to 300 msec, the control pointer is updated to "3", so that the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer is set to "4". , So that the remaining ball processing time of 600 msec is set.

Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 2", "5" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display processing process shown in FIG. 28, and the normal figure display processing is performed. In step B506, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing during display of the normal map, "2600 ms" is acquired as the normal power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, the normal power release time is "2600 msec", so that the normal power is released for 2600 msec, and then, since the control pointer during the normal drawing is "5", the wait is 300 msec. The time is set, and then the control pointer for hitting the normal map is updated to "6", so that the normal power is released for 2600 msec, and then the control pointer for hitting the normal map is updated to "7", so that it is 600 msec. The remaining ball processing time of the normal electric power is set.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S111)
, Winning port switch / status monitoring process (step S107), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S)
115), based on the monitoring result in the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S116), create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device, and set it in the output buffer. Perform processing, etc.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the external information editing process, first, when the glass frame opening error has not occurred (step S801; N) and the main body frame opening error has not occurred (step S802; N), , The off-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. ..
On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y), or
When the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S805), and the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved. It is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", the security signal control timer is updated by -1 (. Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is cleared in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810 is performed. Move to the processing of. again,
When the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been timed up, the process proceeds to step S810 without performing the process of step S809. ..

Then, when the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), when the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), and when the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S81).
2; Y), when a general electric fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), or when a big winning opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the on-data of the security signal is output as external information. Saved in the data area (step S817), saved the on-data of the game machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (step S818), and step S819.
Move to the processing of. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither magnet fraud has occurred (step S810; N), panel radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S811; N), and frame radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S812; N).
, When the fraudulent electric power is not occurring (step S813; N) and the fraudulent prize opening is not occurring (step S814; N), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality is occurring (step S815).
When a switch error is occurring (step S815; Y), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. If a switch error is not occurring (step S815).
In N), the off-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, the main prize ball signal editing process (step S819) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal editing process (step S820) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed.
)I do.
Next, if the symbol confirmation count control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is not "0", -1 is updated (step S821). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is "0" (step S822).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S823), the external information editing process is terminated.
If the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). S824), the external information editing process is terminated.

Next, the control by the staging control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the staging control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 32 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the initial setting of the CPU is performed (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Then, the generation of display data is permitted (step C).
5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal, and the LED by the player
Performs hall / player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the liquid crystal display (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes commands from the game control device 100 and responds to them is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and finally the drawing data is set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, a V blank interrupt (1/6) is created in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second).
When (0 seconds) is entered twice, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, the sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and the control of LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the sub information display device 90 are performed. Perform the decoration control process (step C18) and the movable body control process (step C19) to control the motor and solenoid of the panel effect device 44.
The process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 33 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (
Step C201), it is determined whether or not the number of commands received is not 0 (step C202).
.. Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Then, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
), The command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer.
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
Can be moved to make room. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to the process of step C204. Further, when it is determined that the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 34 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
To determine if the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C23).
4).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not the correct combination (step). C2
34; N) ends the received command analysis process.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (
In step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235).
In Y), a variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
In step C235; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). And MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command processing (step C239; Y) is performed.
Step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of the symbol-based command (
In step C239; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of one-shot commands such as a hold count command and an error command (step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of a single-shot command (step C24).
In 1; Y), a single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the one-shot command (
In step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol-based command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol-based command processing (step C2) is performed.
44) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is in the range of the look-ahead variable system command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N).
Ends the received command analysis process.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the start memory (holding) in which the special figure change display game has not been executed becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be used. It is a production such as performing a production display. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

In addition, commands related to power-on and commands related to probability setting values are processed by single-shot command processing. Examples of commands related to power-on include commands for recovering from a power failure and commands for initializing RAM. Examples of the command related to the probability setting value include commands for changing the probability setting, changing the probability setting value, ending the probability setting change, checking the probability setting value, and ending the confirmation of the probability setting value.

In the above first embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode, but the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on. Even in the case of, the probability setting value may be changed to the changed state. However, since the RAM is initialized when the probability setting value change state ends, either the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the normal figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the special game state is being played, or the normal figure is being hit. It may be a condition that it does not correspond to. Further, it may be a condition that the customer is waiting. Further, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may not be possible to shift to the probability set value change state.

In addition, it was decided to initialize the RAM 111C when the probability setting value change state ends, but RA
The initialization of the RAM 111C may not be performed except when it is determined that the data of the M111C is abnormal.

Further, although the probability values corresponding to each probability setting value are different, the same probability value may be assigned to different probability setting values. FIG. 35A shows the probability setting value in this embodiment. The value in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C is set to take a value of 0 to 5. The same applies to the working probability setting value area. Settings 1 to 6 are assigned as probability setting values corresponding to the values in the probability setting value area. The display of the probability set value display device 153 displays 1 to 6 corresponding to the value of the probability set value. Different probability values are assigned to the probability values in settings 1 to 6.

FIG. 35B shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, the probability values of settings 1 to 3 are assigned as settings 4 to 6. Therefore, it is practically possible to switch the probability value in three stages. Other than this, it is the same as in FIG. 35 (a). By doing so, when the 6-step probability value is unnecessary, only the probability value needs to be different, and the design can be easily changed.

It should be noted that it is free to assign which probability value to which probability setting value, and for example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, and setting 3 and setting 4 may be the same probability value. Since the value in the probability setting value area (working probability setting value area) is updated by +1 by operating the setting value change button, the order of the probability values that change when the setting value change button is operated differs by changing the assignment. It becomes an order. Further, for example, if the same probability value as the other probability setting values is assigned to the two probability setting values, the change stage can be set to 4 stages, and any stage of 1 to 6 can be set.

FIG. 35 (c) also shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, FIG. 35 (b)
The probability setting value display device 153 is changed from the setting 4 to the setting 6 to the setting 1 to the setting 3.
The display in is also set to 1 to 3 corresponding to this. As a result, the display of the probability set value display device 153 and the probability value correspond to each other, so that the person in charge of the work can easily grasp the probability value.

FIG. 35 (d) also shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, all the settings are 1, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, it is possible to set only one probability value substantially, and even if the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary, it is possible to deal with it only by setting the value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100. In this case, the same display is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 even if the setting value change button is operated, but the operation can be performed by performing the specific display (for example, blank display) as described above. It will be easier for workers to know that it has been accepted.

Although the number of values in the probability setting value region is set to 6, any number other than this may be used. For example, in the case of FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c), the number of values in the probability setting value region may be three. Further, in the case of FIG. 35 (d), the number of values in the probability setting value region may be one. Further, in order to make it possible to set a larger number of steps, the number of values in the probability setting value region may be 7 or more. Further, although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the selected probability value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

In addition, the probability value of the big hit is assigned according to the probability setting value, but the probability value of the small hit is also assigned, and the probability value of the small hit is also changed in response to the change of the probability setting value. ing. The probability value of the big hit and the probability value of the small hit corresponding to each probability set value can be determined independently. However, when only big hits and small hits are made as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, it is necessary to set the probability value of the small hit according to the probability value of the big hit. Further, the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the big hit and the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the small hit may be set separately. Further, the probability value of the small hit may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Further, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game may be set according to the probability setting value that defines the probability value of the big hit, or may be set independently.

Further, when the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, and the like are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary. This setting sub-board may be removed, and a sub-board or the like that has undergone termination processing such as GND connection may be connected to the connection portion with the setting sub-board of the game control device 100. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate only the function of changing the probability value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and it is possible to reduce the cost. Further, in a gaming machine having no probability fluctuation function, an operation probability M may be provided for each probability set value.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the gaming control device 100 transmits a command for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out when the power is turned on.

The payout control device 200 in this modification is provided with a storage means capable of retaining the stored contents even when the power is cut off. The storage means stores information on the payout command received from the game control device 100, and pays out based on the information stored here. In this way, since the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the stored contents in the power-off state, the game control device 100 sequentially transmits the payout commands regardless of the state of the payout busy signal. .. Therefore, the information of the unpaid payout command is stored in the storage means of the payout control device 200.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main process shown in FIG. 36 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this process, when the setting change instruction command (specific information) is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), the payout instruction command (specific information) is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S51). Payout control device 2
At 00, based on receiving the command of this payout instruction, payout is started based on the information backed up in its own storage means. By doing so, even if the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be performed based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, and it is possible to prevent the profit of the player from being impaired. can.

In addition, in the staging control device 300, based on receiving the command of the setting change instruction, in addition to the notification prompting the change of the probability set value, the notification that the payout may be performed is also performed. May be. Further, the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200 not only in the above case, but for example, in the case of transmitting the command whose probability setting is being changed in FIG. 6 to the effect control device 300 (step). S40) and when the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S44), the payout control device 20 is also used.
You may send the command (specific information) of the payout instruction to 0.

From the above, the game is executed on the basis of the establishment of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played on a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. The game control means (game control device 100) for controlling, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game based on the information from the game control means, and the probability value used for the lottery of the game are assigned. A setting means (setting means) that enables the selected probability setting value to be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). The payout control means (payout control device 20) that controls the payout of the game medium based on the payout information from the game control device 100) and the game control means.
0), and the game control means is a storage means (R) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is cut off.
AM111C), the validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means when the power is turned on, and the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability set value. When the information stored in the storage means is determined to be not legitimate by the validity determination means, the information is specified by the initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the above. Information is transmitted to the effect control means and the payout control means to stop the control of the game, the effect control means gives a notification prompting the selection of the probability set value based on the reception of the specific information, and the payout control means is the power supply. It is equipped with a payout information storage means that can retain the stored contents even in the blocked state and can store the payout information received from the game control means. When specific information is received, the game medium is based on the payout information stored in the payout information storage means. It means that the control to pay out is performed.
Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and not to impair the profit obtained by the player. Further, when the RAM 111C is initialized, the information of the probability set value set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but it is initialized by performing a notification prompting the selection of the probability set value. It is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is prepared with a plurality of conditions for determining the selected probability set value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability set value change process shown in FIG. 37 is performed instead of the probability set value change process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change process, a confirmation condition monitoring process (step S450) for monitoring whether or not the condition for determining the selected probability setting value is satisfied is performed.

[Determining condition monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the confirmation condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411), and when there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y). ) Clears the end wait flag (step S45).
7), the processing of steps S412 to S415 is performed to end the confirmation condition monitoring processing.

That is, when the worker performs the first operation of touching the operation handle 24, the first definite condition on condition of the input from the touch switch is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. The end wait flag is a flag used to monitor the establishment of the second confirmation condition as described later, and here, the second confirmation condition is satisfied because the first confirmation condition on the condition of input from the touch switch is satisfied. Since it is no longer necessary to monitor, the end wait flag is cleared.

On the other hand, when there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, when the first determination condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not there is an end waiting flag (step S451).
). If there is an end wait flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, the monitoring of the second definite condition has already started. If there is no end wait flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452).

If the setting key switch is not in the off state (step S452; N), the confirmation condition monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the probability setting value change state continues. When the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452; Y), the initial value (for example, 3) is set in the change end timer area.
Save seconds) (step S453) and set the end wait flag (step S454).
).

After that, if the change end timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). If the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the confirmation condition monitoring process is terminated. When the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the processing after step S457 is performed, and the confirmation condition monitoring processing is terminated. That is, the second definite condition is satisfied and the selected probability setting value is set when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation of turning off the setting key switch performing the second operation is performed. It has become so.

As described above, in this modification, the probability setting value selected by satisfying either the first definite condition or the second definite condition is set as the probability setting value used for the game.
Until these confirmation conditions are satisfied, the selected probability setting value is stored in the working probability setting value area, and the information in the probability setting value area in which the probability setting value used in the game is stored is changed. do not have. Therefore, if the power is cut off before the determination condition is satisfied, the selected probability setting value is discarded and the original probability setting value is set.

In the probability setting value change state, the operation handle 24 may be touched to notify that the selected probability setting value is set. This notification may be always performed in the state where the probability setting value is changed, or may be performed only in the state where the end wait flag is set. Further, the first definite condition and the second definite condition are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions and can be arbitrarily set. For example, the second confirmation condition may be set only when the setting key switch is turned off. Further, a probability setting value selected by preparing three or more definite conditions and satisfying any of them may be set.

Further, although it is assumed that the original probability setting value is set when the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, a predetermined probability setting value may be set. For example, if the information in the probability setting value area is set to the initial value (for example, setting 1) based on the start of the probability setting value change state, and the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, this initial value. May be set. In this case, an arbitrary probability setting value can be set in advance as the initial value, but for example, the same probability as the probability setting value set when the area for the probability setting value of the RAM 111C is initialized. It may be a set value.

From the above, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game is executed based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and a special gaming state is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)).
A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means is among a plurality of confirmation conditions. It means that the selected probability setting value is set based on the fact that either of them is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to surely change the probability set value. In addition, by providing a plurality of definite conditions, the degree of freedom of work can be increased, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved.

In addition, if the power is cut off before any of the multiple confirmation conditions is satisfied, the setting means will be used.
It means that the selected probability setting value is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

Further, the plurality of definite conditions include a first definite condition and a second definite condition, the first definite condition is that a predetermined first operation has been performed, and the second definite condition is the first operation. Is that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to surely change the probability set value.

[Third modification example]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification does not have a setting key operation unit in the setting means, and does not have a setting key switch 152. In addition, the conditions for transitioning to a changeable state in which the probability setting value can be changed are different.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main process shown in FIG. 39 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this process, when the backed up information is normal and the probability setting value is not changed (step S21; N), is the setting value change switch turned on from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier? Is determined (step S61).

When the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S61; N), the process proceeds to step S30 in FIG. 6 in order to perform processing when the power is normally restored from the power failure. Further, when the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S61; Y), the transition determination process is performed (step S62). As will be described later, in the transition determination process, it is determined whether the transition condition to the probability setting value change state is satisfied, and if the transition condition is satisfied, the probability setting value changing flag is set. ..

When the flag for changing the probability set value is set in the transition determination process (step S63; Y), the figure is used to perform the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the set value can be changed. The process proceeds to step S35 of 6. In this modification, since the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process, the process of step S37 does not have to be performed. Further, when the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S63; N).
Goes to step S41 of FIG. 6 in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM area for game control.

On the other hand, when the backed up information is not normal, the RAM clear start address 1
(Step S25), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the set value change switch is on (step S64). When the setting value change switch is not in the ON state (step S64; N), the setting change instruction command (specific information)
Is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

Further, when the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S64; Y), the transition determination process is performed (step S65). This transition determination process is the same process as in step S62.
When the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process (step S66; Y),
The process proceeds to step S35 in FIG. 6 in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

[Transition judgment processing]
FIG. 40 shows the transition determination process (steps S62, S65) in the above-mentioned main process. In this transition determination process, first, the initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of the input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S72). Step S73).

In this modification, the staff can shift to the probability set value change state by putting the game balls into the winning area in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, and the winning area provided in the game area 32 is provided. From the state of the input port 1 to which the detection signal from is input, it is determined whether or not this transition condition is satisfied. When this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y),
The probability setting value changing flag is set (step S76), and the transition determination process is terminated. As a result, the probability setting value is changed.

If the transition condition is not satisfied (step S73; N), the transition standby timer is 0.
If not, -1 is updated (step S74), and it is determined whether the migration wait timer is 0 (step S75). If the transition standby timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

If the migration standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the migration determination process ends. That is, if the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination process is terminated without setting the probability setting value changing flag. As a result, when the backed up data is normal, the process of initializing the RAM area for game control is performed in step S of FIG.
If the data is transferred to 41 and the backed up data is abnormal, step S
The processing of 28 and S29 is performed and the control is stopped.

The transition conditions may or may not be changed at the amusement store. Further, although the transition condition is set to put the game balls in the winning area in a predetermined order, a predetermined number of game balls may be put in the predetermined winning area regardless of the order. Further, a predetermined detection by one detection means may be a transition condition. In this case, it may be a condition that only the detection by the detection means has been detected, or it may be a predetermined condition that the detection means has performed a plurality of detections in a predetermined mode (number of detections, detection interval, etc.). ..

Further, although the detection sensor in the winning region is used as the detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operation handle 24 or the set value change switch 151 may be enabled. However, it is preferable that the transition condition includes detection by a detection means that the player cannot freely operate during the game, such as a detection sensor in the winning area.

Further, a plurality of DIP switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is open, and are used as detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, and the transition is made when the state of each DIP switch is a predetermined state. The condition may be satisfied. Further, the keyboard may be provided at a position where the keyboard can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened and used as a detection means used to establish the transition condition, and the transition condition may be satisfied by the password input from the keyboard. ..

In addition, only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the establishment of the transition condition is monitored and the transition to the probability setting value changing state is possible, but the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Even when the set value change switch 151 is not turned on, it may be possible to monitor the establishment of the transition condition and shift to the probability set value change state. In this case, the period for monitoring the establishment of the transition condition may always be set based on the power-on of the gaming machine, or the transition condition when the setting value change switch 151 is operated after the power is turned on. You may start a period to monitor the establishment of.

From the above, in a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state that grants a gaming value to a player when the game is executed based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. Detection means used (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a,
Starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, big winning opening switch 38a) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means is a mode predetermined by the detection means. It means that it is possible to select the probability setting value when the detection of. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means has the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally.
In addition, the number of gaming machines that can simultaneously execute the probability setting value change work is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value can be changed simultaneously on multiple gaming machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

In addition, it is used in a game in a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state that grants a gaming value to a player when the game is executed based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. A plurality of detection means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, large winning opening switch 38a) and a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a lottery of a game is assigned. A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). In addition, the setting means enables selection of a probability setting value when a plurality of detection means detect a predetermined mode. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means has the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally. In addition, the number of gaming machines that can simultaneously execute the probability setting value change work is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value can be changed simultaneously on multiple gaming machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

The setting means makes it possible to select the probability set value when the detection means detects the predetermined mode within a certain period after the power is turned on. therefore,
It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

In addition, the plurality of detection means cannot be operated by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability set value is changed by the set value change operation unit configured by the DIP switch.

The DIP switch forming the set value changing operation unit is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is open, and the input state thereof is input to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 41, three DIP switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as set value change operation units, and the state of the DIP switch corresponding to each probability set value is defined.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability set value change process shown in FIG. 42 is performed instead of the probability set value change process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change process, it is determined whether the state of the set value change operation unit has changed (step S461), and if it has changed (step S461), the value in the work probability setting value area is set to the corresponding value. (Step S462). As a result, the desired probability setting value is set by operating the setting value changing operation unit during the probability setting value changing state and ending the probability setting value changing state as a state corresponding to the desired probability setting value. Will be.

By using the DIP switch in this way, the work of setting a desired probability set value becomes easy, and the set probability set value can be grasped at a glance. Since the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance, the probability setting value display device 153
May not be provided. Further, a cover covering the DIP switch may be attached so that the state of the DIP switch is not immediately visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

Further, in order to make it easier to grasp the state of each DIP switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each DIP switch so that it lights up when the corresponding DIP switch is ON. Further, the confirmation LED may be turned on all the time, or may be turned on only in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode.

In addition, the set value change operation unit is not limited to the DIP switch, but may be a toggle switch or a rotary switch, and any switch can be used as long as the probability set value can be grasped by visually recognizing the state of each switch. Anything is fine.

Also, depending on the state of the setting key switch 152, the probability setting value is changed.
As in the third modification described above, the probability set value change state may be changed depending on the state of the set value change switch 151, and the probability set value change state may be terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed. In this case, the probability setting value may be set based on the state of the setting value changing operation unit when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the setting value changing operation unit at the time when the predetermined confirmation operation is performed. The probability setting value may be set.

In addition, when the probability setting value is not changed, the currently set probability setting value is compared with the state of the setting value change operation unit, and monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether the two states match. Is also good. The monitoring process may be performed at all times when the probability set value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time such as when the power is turned on or when the special figure fluctuation display game is started.
In addition, it may be performed regularly at regular intervals. When it is determined by the monitoring process that the two states do not match, the notification that an abnormality has occurred may be given, or the game may be stopped.

[Fifth variant]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is the setting key switch 152 and CP for enabling the change of the probability setting value.
If the wiring to and from U111A is broken, the game cannot be played.

In this modification, a setting sub-board serving as a setting means including a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability setting value display device 153, and the like is provided, and this setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100. It has become like. For example, as shown in FIG. 43A, the wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100 via the connector 154.
Is connected to. The setting value change switch 151 is not shown here.

FIG. 43A shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed and the input to the CPU 111A is set to LOW, and the input from the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the off state. Based on this, the probability setting value is not changed and the game can proceed. Further, in the gaming machine of this modification, an LED is provided as a confirmation means that makes it possible to visually recognize the state of the setting key switch 152. In the state of FIG. 14A, the confirmation means is turned off, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the off state.

FIG. 43B shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is opened and the input to the CPU 111A is HI, so that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state.

As described above, the probability setting value is changed on the condition that the setting key of the setting key operation unit is set to the second position and the input from the setting key switch 152 is turned on when the power is turned on. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 constitutes the specific operation information input based on the operation of the operation unit so as to be in a specific state, and is based on the input of this specific operation information. The probability setting value can be selected and the probability setting value is changed. In this probability set value change state, the game cannot proceed, and by ending the probability set value change state, the game can proceed.

FIG. 43 (c) shows the case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 43 (d) shows the case where the connector 154 is disconnected. CPU in either case
The input to the 111A is set to HI, and it is recognized that the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state.

That is, since the state is the same as when the probability setting value can be changed, the specific operation information is input in this case as well. As a result, the probability set value is changed and the game cannot proceed. In this way, by making it possible to input specific operation information even when the wire is broken or the connector is disconnected, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in the case of an abnormality.
Further, since the confirmation means is lit even though the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

Although the example in which the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 are connected by the connector 154 is given here, the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 may be directly connected without going through the connector 154. Further, the game control device 10 is a setting sub-board that serves as a setting means provided with a setting key switch 152 or the like.
Although it is said that the game control device 100 is provided separately from 0, the game control device 100 may be provided with a setting key switch 152 or the like and the setting means may be integrated with the game control device 100. It is possible to detect a disconnection between the key switch 152 and the CPU 111A or a disconnection of the connector.

Further, here, the specific operation information is input when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is lost, but the specific operation is performed when the connection between the setting sub-board and the game control device 100 is lost. Information may be entered. Further, the setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switch 152 or the like in the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output specific operation information.

From the above, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and generating a special gaming state in which a gaming value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value connected to the control means and assigned the probability value used for the lottery of the game are set by the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state. Based on this, the specific operation information is input to the control means so that the probability setting value can be selected, and the control means does not proceed with the game while the specific operation information is input. If the wiring between the setting means and the control means is broken, the specific operation information is input to the control means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability set value.

Further, when the power is turned on while the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state, the probability setting value can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability set value.

<Character appearance fluctuation>
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modification of the first embodiment) is, as a decorative special figure variation display game to be displayed on the display device 41, a character of the decoration special symbol Z at the start of the special figure variation display game. It is possible to execute a character appearance variation (decorative special figure variation display game of the character appearance variation mode) in which the image Z2 is erased and the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z appears in the middle of the special figure variation display game.

The effect control device 300 executes a variation display effect of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game in association with the execution of the special figure variation display game. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 41a provided in the central portion of the display area of the display device 41.
The decorative special symbol Z displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas constituting the decorative special symbol variable display game display unit 41a is at least a numerical image (numerical symbol) as shown in FIG. 44 (a), for example. ) Z1 and a character image (character symbol) Z2. Further, in the decorative special symbol Z, it is possible to erase the character image Z2 while leaving the numerical image Z1.
The decorative special symbol Z may be composed of at least a numerical image Z1 and a character image Z2, and the decorative special symbol Z includes the numerical image Z1 and / or the character in addition to the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z2. The frame image displayed behind the image Z2, the frame decoration image for decorating the frame image, the character decoration image for decorating the character image Z2 (for example, the image of the weapon or item possessed by the character), and the numerical image Z1 are emphasized. An enhanced image (for example, an effect image applied around a number) or the like may be included.

In the example shown in FIG. 44 (a), in addition to the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 41a, the first waiting hold display for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the undigested first start memory is displayed. Part 41
b1, the second waiting hold display unit 41b2 that displays the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the undigested second start memory, and the start memory during digestion (corresponding to the currently running special figure variation display game). A small symbol that is relatively smaller than the decorative special symbol (identification information) that is variablely displayed on the running hold display unit 41c that displays information related to the start memory) and the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 41a is displayed in a variable manner. A variable display unit 41d for small symbols and a number holding display unit 41e for displaying the number of undigested start memories numerically are provided.

There are two types of character appearance fluctuations: character appearance fluctuation A and character appearance fluctuation B.
44 (b) shows an example of the flow of the character appearance variation A, and FIGS. 45 to 47 show an example of the display on the display device 41 when the character appearance variation A is executed.
In the character appearance variation A, when the special figure variation display game starts (t11), the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z that is stopped and displayed is performed (see FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b)), and the decoration is displayed. The character image Z2 of the special symbol Z is erased.
Here, the axis rotation display is a "variable display mode in which the disk rotates about an axis along the radial direction". That is, in the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z, for example, the numerical image Z on the surface.
A decorative special symbol Z (hereinafter referred to as "character-less symbol") including 1 and a character image Z2 is drawn, and a decorative special symbol Z (hereinafter referred to as "character-less symbol") including a numerical image Z1 but not including a character image Z2 is drawn on the back surface. ) Is drawn, and the virtual disk is displayed so as to rotate about the axis along the radial direction of the virtual disk.

In the axis rotation display when erasing the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z, the virtual disk is rotated half a turn so that the surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the character-bearing symbol is drawn) can be seen. After only the side surface of the disk can be seen, the back surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the characterless pattern is drawn) can be seen. The character image Z2 disappears when only the side surface of the virtual disk can be seen, and the character no symbol is displayed after that.
In the present embodiment, in the axis rotation display when erasing the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z, the decorative special symbol Z (virtual disk) is rotated half a turn, and the character image Z2 is displayed in the middle of the axis rotation display. Although it is erased, the rotation mode of the axis rotation display and the erase timing of the character image Z2 can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, a special decorative pattern Z (virtual disk)
The axis rotation display may be performed by rotating the character image Z2 by one rotation or more, or the character image Z2 may be deleted at the end of the axis rotation display.
Further, an image (character image, effect image, etc.) capable of suggesting a big hit expectation may be displayed on the side surface of the virtual disk (side surface of the decorative special symbol Z). In this way, by displaying an image that cannot be seen without paying close attention, the attention of the decorative special symbol Z can be increased.

On the other hand, in the axis rotation display (described later) when the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z appears, the virtual disk is rotated half a turn to see the back surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the characterless symbol is drawn). The state is converted from the state in which only the side surface of the virtual disk can be seen to the state in which the surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the character symbol is drawn) can be seen. The character image Z2 appears when only the side surface of the virtual disk can be seen, and the character symbol is displayed after that.
In the present embodiment, in the axis rotation display when the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z appears, the decorative special symbol Z (virtual disk) is rotated half a turn, and the character image Z2 is displayed in the middle of the axis rotation display. I tried to make it appear, but the rotation mode of the axis rotation display and the character image Z2
Appearance timing can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, the axis rotation display in which the decorative special symbol Z (virtual disk) is rotated by one rotation or more may be performed, or the character image Z2 may appear at the end of the axis rotation display.

Next, when the axis rotation display ends (t12), the variable display (scroll display) of the decorative special symbol Z starts (see FIG. 45 (c)), and first, the decorative special symbol Z fluctuates at a speed that is difficult to identify. The high-speed fluctuation display to be displayed is performed (see FIG. 46 (a)).
Next, when the high-speed fluctuation display is completed (t13), a low-speed fluctuation display is performed in which the decorative special symbol Z is variablely displayed at an identifiable speed (see FIG. 46 (b)).
Next, when the low-speed fluctuation display ends (t14), a temporary stop display is performed in which the decorative special symbol Z is oscillatedly displayed at a fixed position (stop display position) (see FIG. 46 (c)).

Next, in the middle of the temporary stop display, a concealed image Y (for example, an image imitating smoke) that conceals the decorative special symbol Z is displayed (see FIG. 47 (a)). Since the hidden image Y gradually becomes thinner and disappears, the visibility behind the hidden image Y (the part of the image displayed behind the hidden image Y that overlaps with the hidden image Y) is concealed. It gradually improves from the state of being blocked by the image Y and completely invisible, and eventually becomes the same as before the hidden image Y is displayed. It should be noted that it may be possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit or the like depending on the display mode of the hidden image Y. Specifically, for example, the concealed image Y of the first display mode (for example, a black concealed image or a small concealed image) suggests that the expectation of the game is low, and the concealed image Y of the second display mode is used. (For example, a red concealed image or a large concealed image) may indicate that the game has high expectations.
Next, when the concealed image Y becomes thin and the back of the concealed image Y (decorative special symbol Z, etc.) becomes faint, the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z temporarily stopped is performed ( (See FIG. 47 (b)), the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z appears.

Then, when the axis rotation display is completed (t15), the decorative special symbol Z is stopped and displayed, and the result of the special symbol variation display game is displayed (see FIG. 47 (c)).
In the example shown in FIG. 44 (b), the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z is started before the concealed image Y disappears, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the decoration is performed after the concealed image Y disappears. The axis rotation display of the special symbol Z may be started.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 44 (b), the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z is terminated after the concealed image Y disappears, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the concealed image Y disappears at the same time. The axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z may be terminated.

FIG. 44 (c) shows an example of the flow of the character appearance variation B, and FIGS. 45 and 48 show an example of the display on the display device 41 when the character appearance variation B is executed.
In the character appearance variation B, when the special figure variation display game starts (t21), the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z that is stopped and displayed is performed (see FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b)), and the decoration is displayed. The character image Z2 of the special symbol Z is erased.
Next, when the axis rotation display ends (t22), the variable display (scroll display) of the decorative special symbol Z starts (see FIG. 45 (c)), and first, the decorative special symbol Z fluctuates at a speed that is difficult to identify. The high-speed fluctuation display to be displayed is performed (see FIG. 48 (a)).
Next, when the high-speed fluctuation display is completed (t23), a low-speed fluctuation display is performed in which the decorative special symbol Z is variablely displayed at an identifiable speed.

Next, the character image Z2 appears in the middle of the low-speed fluctuation display. Specifically, the decorative special symbol Z to be stopped and displayed is displayed at low speed with no character symbol, and the decorative special symbol Z to be stopped is displayed with low speed fluctuation with the character symbol (see FIG. 48 (b)). That is, when the decorative special symbol Z to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the decorative special symbol variation display game display unit 41a, the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z is displayed.
Next, when the low-speed fluctuation display ends (t24), the temporary stop display in which the decorative special symbol Z is oscillatedly displayed at a fixed position (stop display position) is performed for a shorter period than the temporary stop display in the character appearance variation A.
Then, when the temporary stop display is completed (t25), the decorative special symbol Z is stopped and displayed, and the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed (see FIG. 48 (c)).

In this way, the character appearance variation B performs the temporary stop display of the decorative special symbol Z, but the period of the temporary stop display in the character appearance variation B is shorter than the period of the temporary stop display in the character appearance variation A.
In the character appearance variation A, the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z is displayed after the low-speed variation display is completed.
However, in the character appearance variation B, the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z appears in the middle of the low-speed variation display. Since the period of the temporary stop display in the character appearance variation B is a short period, the effect when the character image Z2 appears during the temporary stop display (the effect of rotating the axis of the decorative special symbol Z and the hidden image Y are displayed). It is not possible to perform the production). therefore,
Character image Z2 of decorative special symbol Z after the end of low-speed fluctuation display in character appearance fluctuation B
When the character image Z2 appears, the character image Z2 is suddenly displayed without such an effect being executed. Therefore, the character image Z2 is suddenly displayed, giving the player a sense of incongruity, or the character image Z2 is suddenly displayed. By displaying it, there is a possibility that the player may be misunderstood that some information has been notified. Therefore, in order not to give the player a sense of discomfort or misunderstanding, in the character appearance variation B, the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z is made to appear in the middle of the low-speed variation display.
It should be noted that the character appearance variation B may be configured so that the temporary stop display of the decorative special symbol Z is not performed.

When the variation time of the special figure variation display game is long (that is, when the execution time value of the special figure variation display game is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value), the effect control device 300 has a decorative feature corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Figure As a variation display game, character appearance variation A (character appearance variation that performs a long-term temporary stop display) can be executed. In addition, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game is short (that is, when the execution time value of the special figure variation display game is less than a predetermined threshold value), the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. As a character appearance variation B (character appearance variation that performs a temporary stop display for a short period of time) can be executed.
The character appearance variation B may be executed even when the fluctuation time is long, and the character appearance variation A may be executed even when the fluctuation time is short. Specifically, for example, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game is long, the character appearance fluctuation A (character appearance fluctuation that performs a long-term temporary stop display) is the character appearance fluctuation B (short-term provisional). Character appearance fluctuation that displays stop)
If it is easier to select than, and the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game is short, the character appearance fluctuation B
(Character appearance variation that performs a short-term temporary stop display) may be configured to be easier to select than character appearance variation A (character appearance variation that performs a long-term temporary stop display).

It is also possible to make the selection rates of the character appearance fluctuations A and B different according to the degree of expectation that will be a big hit. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot expectation is high, it is possible to notify that the jackpot expectation is high by configuring the character appearance variation B to be easily selected and suddenly displaying the character image Z2. Is.
Further, in the case of the character appearance variation A, it is possible to notify the expected degree of big hit depending on the display mode of the hidden image Y, but in the character appearance variation B, the hidden image Y is not displayed, so such notification is performed. I can't. Therefore, in the case of the character appearance variation B, it is possible to configure such notification so as not to perform such notification, or it is also possible to configure such notification to be performed by a mode other than the display mode of the hidden image Y. For example, such notification may be performed depending on the display mode (size, color, etc.) of the character image Z2 that appears in the middle of the low-speed fluctuation display, or such notification may be performed by displaying the notification image. Also good, speaker 19
Such notification may be performed by the acoustic effect by a and 19b, or the decorative effect by the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable display game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the game value is given to the player. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state, a variable display game (decorative special figure) is performed by performing variable display and stop display of a symbol (decorative special symbol Z) in each of a plurality of variable display areas provided on the display device 41. An execution means (effect control device 300) for executing a variable display game) is provided, and the symbol has a symbol configuration including an identification image (numerical image Z1) and an erasable character image Z2, and the execution means is variable. In the case of display, the display mode of the symbol can be converted into a low-speed fluctuation display mode in which the symbol can be identified and a high-speed fluctuation display mode in which the symbol is difficult to identify, and the display mode of the symbol can be changed at high speed. The variable display game of the first variable mode (character appearance variation A) in which the display mode is converted to the low-speed variable display mode and then the stop display is performed via the temporary stop display mode, and the high-speed variable display of the symbol display mode. Convert from mode to slow variable display mode, then
It is possible to execute a variation display game (character appearance variation B) of the second variation mode in which the stop display is performed after passing through the temporary stop display mode for a shorter period than the first variation mode, and the variation of the first variation mode. In the display game, the character image Z2 is erased at the start of the variation display game, the high-speed variation display mode is executed with a symbol configuration (character-less symbol) that does not include the character image Z2, and the character image is executed during the execution of the temporary stop display mode. The result of the variable display game is displayed by making Z2 appear and performing a stop display with a symbol configuration (character-bearing symbol) including the character image Z2. In the variable display game of the second variable mode, the variable display game is displayed. At the start, the character image Z2 is erased and the high-speed variation display mode is executed with a symbol configuration (character-less symbol) that does not include the character image Z2. The result of the variable display game is displayed by performing a stop display with a symbol configuration (character-bearing symbol) including.

Therefore, in the variation display game of the second variation mode (character appearance variation B), the character image Z2 appears in the middle of the low-speed variation display, not after the end of the low-speed variation display, so that the player feels uncomfortable or excessively expected. It is possible to prevent the game from being given, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.
The identification image is not limited to the number image Z1, and may be a character image or a symbol image other than the numbers.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution means (effect control device 300) is when the execution time value of the variable display game is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value (when the variable time of the special figure variable display game is long). When the variation display game (character appearance variation A) of the first variation mode is executed and the execution time value of the variation display game is less than a predetermined threshold value (when the variation time of the special figure variation display game is short). It can be configured to execute the variation display game (character appearance variation B) of the second variation mode.
With this configuration, it is possible to display a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in a different mode according to the execution time value of the variable display game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution means (effect control device 300) has a symbol (decorative special symbol Z) when the character image Z2 is erased and when the character image Z2 appears.
) Is displayed by rotating the axis and the concealed image Y is displayed by superimposing the symbol (decorative special symbol Z) on the symbol (decorative special symbol Z). It can be configured to transform into a difficult state.
With this configuration, the character image Z2 can be erased and the character image Z2 can appear without any discomfort.

Here, in the present embodiment, the difficult-to-identify state in the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z is
Only the side surface of the decorative special pattern Z (virtual disk) can be seen. Further, the difficult-to-identify state in the display of the hidden image Y is a state in which the hidden image Y is dark, that is, a state in which the decorative special symbol Z is blocked by the hidden image Y and cannot be seen at all.
In the present embodiment, only the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z is performed when the character image Z2 is erased, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z when the character image Z2 is erased. (Or instead), the hidden image Y may be displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, both the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z and the display of the hidden image Y are performed when the character image Z2 appears, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative special symbol is displayed when the character image Z2 appears. Only one of the axis rotation display of Z and the display of the hidden image Y may be performed.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display) in which identification information (decorative special symbol Z) is variablely displayed in a variable display area on the display device 41 based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a game is executed and a special gaming state is given to the player when the result of the stop display of the identification information becomes a special result, the identification information is an identification image (numerical image). It is a configuration including Z1) and a character image Z2, and the character image Z2 is erased at the start of the variable display game to perform variable display in a configuration not including the character image Z2, and a temporary stop display before the stop display is being performed. The character image Z2 is made to appear in the character image Z.
A variation display game (character appearance variation A) of the first variation mode in which a stop display is performed with a configuration including 2.
At the start of the variable display game, the character image Z2 is erased to perform variable display in a configuration that does not include the character image Z2, and when the identification information is displayed in the variable display area, the character image Z2 is made to appear to display the character image Z2. It is possible to execute a variation display game (character appearance variation B) of the second variation mode in which a stop display is performed with a configuration including the following.

Therefore, in the variation display game of the second variation mode (character appearance variation B), the character image Z2 appears in the middle of the variation display, not after the end of the variation display, which gives the player a sense of discomfort or excessive expectation. It is possible to prevent the game from being lost, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.
The identification image is not limited to the number image Z1, and may be a character image or a symbol image other than the numbers.

<Operation promotion production>
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modification of the first embodiment) can execute an operation promotion effect that promotes the operation of the effect button 25.
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has, as an operation promotion effect, an assembly effect of displaying a moving image of a plurality of parts until the effect button 25 is completed before the operation valid period of the effect button 25.
The effect button 25 displayed as a result of the assembly effect during the operation valid period of the effect button 25.
It is possible to perform an effect including a notification effect of displaying the promotion image G1 including the button image G11 imitating the above and notifying that the operation to the effect button 25 can be accepted.

FIG. 49 shows an example of an exploded perspective view of the effect button 25.
As shown in FIG. 49, for example, the effect button 25 includes an outer lens 25a provided with a touch panel 29, a decorative member 25b, a decorative sheet 25c, an inner lens 25d, and a touch substrate 2.
It is composed of 5e, an LED substrate 25f, a reflector 25g, a spring 25h, a base 25i, and a plurality of screws 25j.

50 to 55 show an example of the display on the display device 41 when the operation promotion effect is executed.
As shown in FIG. 50A, for example, the effect control device 300 performs a variable display effect of displaying a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game as the special figure variable display game is executed. Run. Then, at a predetermined timing, the effect control device 300 starts the assembly effect of the operation promotion effect.
In the assembly effect, first, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), for example, a component image imitating a component constituting the effect button 25 is displayed.

In the example shown here, among the component images imitating the components constituting the effect button 25, the component image imitating the touch board 25e and the component image imitating the screw 25j are omitted. In this way, by performing the assembly effect of assembling the effect button 25 from a plurality of parts in which some of the actual parts are omitted, the internal structure of the effect button 25 is not clarified even if the assembly effect is performed. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against. That is, when the internal structure of the effect button 25 is clarified, there is a possibility of promoting fraudulent acts such as mischief on the effect button 25. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect button 25 is performed even if the assembly effect is performed.
Since the internal structure of the staging button 25 is not clarified, the assembly staging does not become a factor that promotes fraudulent acts against the staging button 25. The parts omitted in the assembly effect are not limited to the touch substrate 25e and the screw 25j, and can be appropriately changed.

Further, the LED substrate 25f is actually screwed to the reflector 25g, but in the example shown here, since the component image imitating the screw 25j is omitted, the LED substrate 25f has the inner lens 25d and the reflector 25g. It can be made to look like it is sandwiched between. In this way, by performing an assembly effect of assembling the effect button 25 by assembling some parts by an assembly method different from the actual one, the internal structure of the effect button 25 is not clarified even if the assembly effect is performed. It is possible to prevent cheating against 25. note that,
In the assembly production, the assembly method different from the actual one is not limited to different methods such as pinching and screwing, and may be, for example, different parts on the receiving side (assembled parts). That is, the LED substrate 25f is actually assembled to the reflector 25g, but in the assembly effect, the LED substrate 25f may be assembled to a component other than the reflector 25g. Further, the parts (assembled parts) to be assembled by an assembly method different from the actual one in the assembly effect are not limited to the LED substrate 25f and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the assembly effect, the probability setting value currently set is suggested by the display mode of at least one component image among the plurality of component images. In the example shown here, the component image imitating the decorative sheet 25c is decorated with "V", and the color of the component image is white. This decoration "V" is a decoration that is not applied to the actual decorative sheet 25c.

FIG. 52 (c) shows an example of a display mode corresponding to the currently set probability setting value. For example, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), if the component image imitating the decorative sheet 25c is decorated with "V" and the color of the component image is white, it corresponds to "setting 4". The example shown here suggests that the currently set probability setting value is "setting 4".
The display mode corresponding to the currently set probability setting value is not limited to that shown in FIG. 52 (c).
Further, it is also possible to suggest the currently set probability setting value by the display mode of the component image imitating the component other than the decorative sheet 25c.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the reflector 25 g, the spring 25 h, and the base 2
Step of combining 5i (specifically, for example, a spring 25h and a reflector 2 on a base 25i
A video that imitates the process of assembling 5g) is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), for example, a step of combining the combined component group, the LED substrate 25f, the inner lens 25d, and the decorative sheet 25c (specifically, for example, the reflector 2).
A moving image imitating the process of assembling the LED substrate 25f, the inner lens 25d, and the decorative sheet 25c to 5g is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), for example, a moving image simulating a process of combining the combined parts group and the decorative member 25b (specifically, for example, a process of assembling the decorative member 25b to the base 25i) is displayed. Will be done.
Next, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), the combined parts group and the outer lens 25a are combined (specifically, for example, the outer lens 25a is assembled to the reflector 25g) to complete the effect button 25. A video that imitates the process is displayed. As a result, the button image G11 imitating the effect button 25 is displayed.

Next, when the operation valid period starts, the effect control device 300 starts the notification effect of the operation promotion effect, and displays the button image G11 and the remaining length of the operation valid period, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (a). A promotion image G1 including a notification image G12 (for example, a time bar image) to be notified and an instruction image G13 (for example, a character image such as "press!" Or "continuous hit!") Instructing an operation mode of the effect button 25 is displayed. ..
Then, during the operation valid period, the effect button 2 is performed in the operation mode instructed by the instruction image G13.
When 5 is operated, the staging control device 300 starts the decorative special figure displayed on the first waiting hold display unit 41b1 and the second waiting hold display unit 41b2, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (b). Among the memory displays, a hold change effect (a type of look-ahead effect) is performed in which the display mode of the target decorative special figure start memory display is changed to notify the result of the pre-judgment.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value currently set is suggested by the display mode of the component image among the production modes of the assembly effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the component image is replaced with (or the display mode of the component image). In addition), it is also possible to suggest a probability setting value currently set by other aspects.
For example, the probability setting value may be suggested by the number of component images to be omitted, for example, the smaller the number of component images to be omitted, the higher the probability setting value.
Further, for example, the currently set probability setting value may be suggested by the combination of colors and patterns of each component image.
Further, for example, a component image imitating the screw 25j may be displayed, and a probability setting value currently set may be suggested depending on the rotation direction, rotation speed, or the like of the component image. At that time, it is also possible to display an effect image for emphasizing the rotation (for example, an image of a spark that seems to be generated by the rotation).

Further, for example, the probability setting value may be suggested by the number of processes appearing during the assembly effect, for example, the larger the number of processes appearing during the assembly effect, the higher the probability setting value. Specifically, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 50 (c), the step of combining the base 25i and the spring 25h and the step of combining the reflector 25g are performed at the same time, but these steps are performed separately. Therefore, the number of processes that appear during the assembly production increases. Further, for example, FIG. 51 (a).
), The process of combining the LED substrate 25f, the process of combining the inner lens 25d, and the process of combining the decorative sheet 25c are performed at the same time. The number of processes that appear inside will increase. Further, for example, FIGS. 51 (b), (
In the example shown in c), the step of combining the decorative member 25b and the process of combining the outer lens 25a are performed separately, but by performing these processes at the same time, the number of processes appearing in the assembly production. Is reduced.
Further, the display area of the display device 41 is divided into a plurality of small areas, an assembly effect of simultaneously performing a plurality of processes in one small area is executed, and each of the plurality of processes is performed separately in another small area. It is also possible to configure it as such. Specifically, the display area of the display device 41 is divided into a small area A and a small area B.
And the small area C (for example, the small area A is larger than the small area B and the small area C), and the assembly effect in which the first step and the second step are performed simultaneously in the small area A is executed. The first step may be performed in the small area B, and the second step may be performed in the small area C. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the production time (execution time of the assembly production), and since the details of the assembly method (although different from the actual assembly method) can be displayed, a realistic assembly production can be executed. It becomes possible to do.

Further, for example, the probability setting value is lower as the number of processes appearing in the assembly effect increases as the number of processes that do not satisfy the predetermined assembly order condition is higher. Probability setting values may be suggested. Specifically, for example, when the predetermined assembly order condition is the condition that "parts are united in order from the back", the assembly effect is shown in FIG. 50.
(B)-> FIG. 50 (c)-> FIG. 51 (a)-> FIG. 51 (b)-> ..., that is, when a process that does not satisfy a predetermined assembly order condition does not appear, and when the assembly effect is shown in FIG. 50. (B) → Fig. 5
3 (a)-> FIG. 51 (a)-> FIG. 51 (b)-> ..., that is, when a process that does not satisfy the predetermined assembly order condition appears, the assembly order of the effect button 25 in the assembly effect. Is different.

Further, the probability setting value is higher as the protrusion amount of the outer lens 25a is larger, and the probability setting currently set by the protrusion amount of the outer lens 25a in the completed image (that is, the button image G11 imitating the effect button 25) is set. You may suggest a value. Specifically, for example, FIG. 51 (
When FIG. 51 (c) is displayed after b), that is, when the button image G11 having the maximum protrusion amount of the outer lens 25a is displayed, and when FIG. 53 (b) is displayed after FIG. 51 (b). That is, when the button image G11 having the minimum protrusion amount of the outer lens 25a is displayed,
The amount of protrusion of the outer lens 25a in the completed image is different.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the internal structure of the effect button 25 from being clarified, that is, to conceal the exact internal structure of the effect button 25, a plurality of parts in which some of the actual parts are omitted are used. , Some parts are assembled by an assembly method different from the actual one to assemble the effect button 25. That is, the assembly production is performed in the production mode in which some parts are omitted and the production mode in which the assembly method is different. However, even if the assembly production is performed in any one of these production modes, the assembly production is performed. The exact internal structure of the staging button 25 can be concealed. Therefore, the assembly production may be performed in any one of these production modes. Further, in addition to these effect modes (or in place of a part or all of these effect modes), the accurate internal structure of the effect button 25 can be concealed by performing an assembly effect in other effect modes. Is possible.

For example, an assembly effect of assembling the effect button 25 from a plurality of parts including parts different from the actual ones may be executed. That is, as another effect mode, an effect mode in which the parts are different may be performed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), a part image imitating a part that is not actually built in is displayed between the part image imitating the reflector 25g and the part image imitating the spring 25h. Thereby, the internal structure of the effect button 25 can be hidden from being clarified.
Further, for example, an assembly effect of assembling the effect button 25 by adding extra parts may be executed. That is, as another effect mode, an effect mode in which extra parts are added may be performed. Specifically, for example, more parts images imitating actual parts (for example, board-based parts (inner lens 25d, touch board 25e, LED board 25f), screws 25j, etc.) are displayed more than the actual number. Thereby, the internal structure of the effect button 25 can be hidden from being clarified. Further, in this case, since the number of steps in the assembly production can be increased, various setting suggestions can be made, and the assembly production can be enlivened.
Further, for example, an assembly effect of assembling the effect button 25 may be executed by omitting a part of the actual process. That is, as another effect mode, an effect mode in which some steps are omitted may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the present embodiment, the assembly production is started from FIG. 50 (b), that is, from the state where all the component images are disassembled, but FIGS. 50 (c), 51 (a), and FIGS. By starting the assembly effect from 51 (b), that is, from the state where a part of the component images is united, the internal structure of the effect button 25 can be obscured. For example, when the assembly effect is started from FIG. 50 (c), the internal structure of the effect button 25 is not clarified because the step of combining the reflector 25 g, the spring 25h, and the base 25i is omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 52B, when the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode instructed by the instruction image G13 during the operation valid period, the hold change effect is executed. However, the effect to be executed when the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode instructed by the instruction image G13 during the operation valid period is not limited to the hold change effect and can be changed as appropriate.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, when the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode instructed by the instruction image G13 during the operation valid period, the decoration that is variablely displayed in the decoration special figure variation display game. A symbol stop effect may be performed to temporarily stop (or stop) the special symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 54, the decorative special symbol is temporarily stopped in all of the left, middle, and right variable display areas constituting the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 41a. The decorative special symbol may be temporarily stopped (or stopped) in at least one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54, the character-less symbol (decorative special symbol including the numerical image but not the character image) is temporarily stopped and displayed, but the character-existing symbol (decorative special symbol including the numerical image and the character image) is temporarily stopped and displayed. ) Can also be displayed as a temporary stop.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, for example, when the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode instructed by the instruction image G13 during the operation valid period, a temporary stop display (or stop display) is displayed in the decorative special figure variation display game. A normal symbol (a decorative special symbol that constitutes a special result mode in which a probabilistic state does not occur after the end of the special game state) is replaced with a probabilistic symbol (a decorative special symbol that constitutes a special result mode in which a probabilistic state occurs after the end of the special game state). You may perform a symbol promotion effect to promote to a symbol). In the example shown in FIG. 55, the normal symbol displayed temporarily stopped is changed to a probabilistic symbol in all of the left, middle, and right variable display areas constituting the decorative special figure variable display game display unit 41a. However, in the symbol promotion effect, the normal symbol that is temporarily stopped (or stopped displayed) in at least one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas may be changed to a probabilistic symbol.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game value is given to the player. In a game machine capable of generating a special gaming state, which is operable by the player, an effect operating means (effect button 25) composed of a plurality of members and an effect control means (effect) for controlling the effect of the game. The control device 300) is provided, and the effect control means can execute a promotion effect (operation promotion effect) that promotes the operation of the effect operation means, and a plurality of the promotion effects are performed before the operation valid period of the effect operation means. An assembly effect that displays a series of effects (in the case of this embodiment, a moving image) that imitates the completion of the effect operation means by the members (parts) of the above, and the result of the assembly effect during the operation valid period of the effect operation means. It consists of a notification effect that displays a promotion image G1 including an operation means image (button image G11) that imitates the effect operation means displayed as, and notifies that an operation to the effect operation means can be accepted. It is possible to suggest predetermined information depending on the production mode of the assembly effect.
Therefore, since a novel promotion effect (operation promotion effect) can be executed, the interest of the promotion effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, a setting means (setting means capable of setting one probability setting value from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game (special figure variation display game) is assigned. The game control device 100) is provided, and it can be configured so that it is possible to suggest a probability setting value set by the setting means as predetermined information depending on the production mode of the assembly effect (the game control device 100) is provided.
See FIG. 52 (c)).
With this configuration, the probability set value can be suggested depending on the effect mode of the assembly effect, so that the promotion effect (operation promotion effect) can be enhanced.
It should be noted that the predetermined information, that is, the information suggested by the effect mode of the assembly effect is not limited to the probability setting value and can be changed as appropriate. Is also good.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the assembly effect is performed by the effect operation means (effect button 2).
It is a series of effects in which component images (part images) imitating the members (parts) constituting 5) are assembled in a predetermined order, and the display mode of some component images in the assembly effect is a specific display mode (.
For example, by changing to a mode with a decoration of "super heat!"), It is possible to configure the expected degree that the result of the game becomes a special result as predetermined information.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the production mode of the assembly production, so that the promotion effect (operation promotion effect) can be enhanced.
It should be noted that the predetermined information, that is, the information suggested by the effect mode of the assembly effect is not limited to the expected degree of big hit and can be changed as appropriate, for example, the probability setting value and the expected degree of reach generation. Is also good.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the assembly effect is performed by the effect operation means (effect button 2).
5) It is a series of effects of synthesizing component images (part images) imitating the members (parts) constituting 5) in a predetermined order, and a specific display mode (for example) of displaying a part of the component images in the assembly effect. By changing to the mode with the decoration of "super heat!"), It can be configured so that it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the result of the game will be a special result as predetermined information.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the production mode of the assembly production, so that the promotion effect (operation promotion effect) can be enhanced.
It should be noted that the predetermined information, that is, the information suggested by the effect mode of the assembly effect is not limited to the expected degree of big hit and can be changed as appropriate, for example, the probability setting value and the expected degree of reach occurrence. Is also good.

Further, in the assembling effect of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, some parts can be assembled by an assembling method different from the actual one to assemble the effect operating means (effect button 25).
With this configuration, even if the assembly effect is performed, the effect operation means (effect button 25).
) Is not clarified, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the staging operation means.

Further, in the assembling effect of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effect operating means (effect button 25) can be configured to be assembled from a plurality of parts including parts different from the actual ones.
With this configuration, even if the assembly effect is performed, the effect operation means (effect button 25).
) Is not clarified, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the staging operation means.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the assembly effect, a part of the actual process can be omitted to assemble the effect operation means (effect button 25).
With this configuration, even if the assembly effect is performed, the effect operation means (effect button 25).
) Is not clarified, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the staging operation means.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the assembly effect, the effect operation means (effect button 25) can be configured to be assembled from a plurality of parts in which some of the actual parts are omitted.
With this configuration, even if the assembly effect is performed, the effect operation means (effect button 25).
) Is not clarified, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the staging operation means.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the promotion image G1 is an operation means image (button image G11) and a valid period notification image (notification image G12) for notifying information regarding an operation valid period.
) And an operation mode instruction image (instruction image G13) for instructing the operation mode of the effect operation means (effect button 25) (see FIG. 52 (a)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a highly appealing promotion effect (operation promotion effect), that is, a promotion effect that effectively enhances the player's motivation to operate.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the staging control means (staging control device 300) is used.
The start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) corresponding to the start memory that is the execution right of the game (special figure variation display game) when the effect operation means (effect button 25) is operated during the operation valid period. The effect of changing the display mode (holding change effect) can be configured to be feasible (see FIG. 52 (b)).
By configuring in this way, an attractive privilege (holding change effect) is given by operating the effect operation means (effect button 25), so that the promotion effect (operation promotion effect)
The effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the staging control means (staging control device 300) is used.
A game (decorative special figure variable display game) is executed by performing variable display of identification information (decorative special symbol) in each of a plurality of variable display areas provided on the display device 41, and the staging operation means (decorative operation means) during the operation valid period. When the effect button 25) is operated, it is possible to configure an effect (symbol stop effect) to temporarily stop or stop the identification information in at least one variable display area among the plurality of variable display areas. (See FIG. 54).
By configuring in this way, an attractive privilege (design stop effect) is given by operating the effect operation means (effect button 25), so that the promotion effect (operation promotion effect)
The effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the staging control means (staging control device 300) is used.
A game (decorative special figure variable display game) is executed by performing variable display of identification information (decorative special symbol) in each of a plurality of variable display areas provided on the display device 41, and the staging operation means (decorative operation means) during the operation valid period. When the effect button 25) is operated, the effect (symbol promotion) that changes the identification information (normal symbol) temporarily stopped or stopped displayed in the variable display area to more advantageous identification information (probability variation symbol) for the player. The effect) can be configured to be feasible (see FIG. 55).
By configuring in this way, an attractive privilege (design promotion effect) is given by operating the effect operation means (effect button 25), so that the promotion effect (operation promotion effect)
The effect of the production can be enhanced.

In the assembly effect, among the parts constituting the effect button 25, those that are difficult for the player to understand or that are invisible (or difficult to see) may be grouped into virtual parts. For example, a combination of substrate-based components (inner lens 25d, touch substrate 25e, LED substrate 25f) may be replaced with a virtual component. As a result, it is possible to shorten the production time and prevent fraudulent acts.
Further, the probability setting value and the jackpot expectation may be suggested according to the display mode of the virtual component. For example, the jackpot expectation may be suggested / notified by the color of the virtual component (for example, the expectation is higher in the order of red>green>yellow>blue> white, etc.). In addition, setting suggestion (probability setting value suggestion) may be performed according to the shape or exterior of the virtual component.

Further, the component image imitating the component constituting the effect button 25 does not have to be an image that realistically reproduces the actual component, and may be a deformed image of the actual component. For example, the screw does not have to reproduce the threads one by one, the number of LEDs on the LED substrate 25f does not have to be completely reproduced, and the decorative member 25b having a complicated shape, the reflector 25g, and the like. The base 25i and the like do not have to be completely reproduced. That is, the component image may be similar to the actual component.
Further, in the above embodiment, the assembly effect of the completed pattern in which the effect button 25 is completely assembled is illustrated, but there may be an assembly effect of an unfinished pattern in which the effect button 25 is not assembled well. After the assembly effect of the completed pattern, the notification effect of displaying the promotion image G1 is executed, but after the assembly effect of the unfinished pattern, the notification effect of displaying the promotion image G1 may not be executed. In this case, it is possible to notify that the effect requiring the operation of the effect button 25 is not executed due to the assembly effect of the unfinished pattern. In the assembly effect of the unfinished pattern, for example, in FIG. 51 (b) (in the state where the button image G11 is completed by assembling one more), the effect that the outer lens 25a does not fit well and fails is executed. be able to.

Further, since the player may misunderstand that the button image G11 is completed (the operation valid period has started) in the middle of the assembly production (for example, from around FIG. 51 (b)), the operation is performed. Before the valid period, it may be notified that the operation is not valid.
Specifically, for example, a notification image G12 (for example, a time bar image) that notifies the remaining length of the operation valid period is displayed at the same time as the start of the assembly effect, and the notification image G12 is not changed during the assembly effect (for example). For example, do not change the contents of the time bar as empty (or full)
By doing so, it is possible to notify the player that the operation is before the valid period.
Alternatively, the notification image G12 is displayed at the same time as the start of the assembly effect, and the notification image G12 notifies the remaining length of the execution time of the assembly effect in a mode different from the notification mode in which the remaining length of the operation valid period is notified. It is also possible to do. As a result, it is possible to notify that it is before the operation valid period, and it is also possible to notify the time when the assembly effect is executed, that is, the time until the operation valid period starts. When the notification mode for notifying the remaining length of the operation valid period is a mode for reducing the time bar, a mode different from the notification mode for notifying the remaining length of the operation valid period (that is, the remaining execution time of the assembly effect). As the notification mode) for notifying the length, for example, a mode for counting down the time can be mentioned.

Further, an integrated image in which a component image imitating the decorative member 25b (may be another component image) and a notification image G12 for notifying the remaining length of the operation valid period may be displayed. At that time, before the operation valid period, the integrated image is displayed in a display mode (for example, an empty (or full tank) time bar and a dark color) to notify that the integrated image is not the operation valid period, and during the operation valid period, the integrated image is integrated. The image may be displayed in a display mode (for example, time bar reduction and bright color) notifying that the operation is valid.

Further, in the assembly effect, a part of the parts is omitted, extra parts are added, the display mode of the part image is the setting suggestion mode, the virtual parts are displayed, and the virtual parts are displayed. When the display mode is an expectation degree suggestion mode, the player may overlook it. Therefore, the display differs depending on the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 and the sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b. It may be notified.
Further, in the assembly effect, not only the state in which the button image G11 is gradually completed only from one direction may be displayed, but also the state in which the button image G11 is assembled from another direction at a predetermined timing may be mixed. For example, after displaying FIG. 51 (b), the orientation of the combined parts group and the outer lens 25a is changed (the orientation is changed so that the outer lens 25a is arranged above the combined parts group), and then the combined parts are combined. A moving image imitating the process of completing the effect button 25 by combining the completed parts group and the outer lens 25a may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to display an image assembled from a direction close to the direction in which the player visually recognizes the effect button 25.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the portions having the same configuration.

FIG. 56 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment. On the surface of the game board 30, the outer peripheral wall 3
A substantially circular gaming area 32 surrounded by 1 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by a resin side case 33 and an outer peripheral wall 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. Further, on the left side of the game area 32, a guide wall 31b is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 to form a taxiway 31a for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32.

In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube), for example. In the area (display area) where the image on the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. Further, the center case 40 is provided with a board staging device 44 that plays a game by operating the center case 40. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 56 toward the center of the display device 41.

Below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is provided.
The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, a warp flow path forming member 614 that receives a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40 and forms a warp flow path that guides the game ball to the stage portion 620 is attached to the left portion of the center case 40. ing. The warp flow path forming member 614 has a front-rear width of the game area 32 (a cover glass (transparent member) 1 that covers the front of the game board 30 from the front surface of the game board main body 80).
It extends forward by the amount (width to the back surface of 4).

The warp flow path formed by the warp flow path forming member 614 is a cylindrical flow path having an inner diameter that allows the game balls to flow down in a row, and opens toward the game area 32 on the left side of the center case 40. It is possible to accept a game ball flowing down the game area 32. This upstream end forms the inlet of the warp flow path. Further, the warp flow path is an L-shaped flow path that guides the game ball that has flowed in from the upstream end to the lower right and then to the rear. Then, the downstream end portion is opened rearward to guide the game ball to the left end portion of the stage portion 620.

The stage portion 620 allows the game ball to roll back and forth and left and right, and has an inclined surface with both left and right sides descending toward the center, and the central portion directly above the first start winning opening 36 protrudes upward. It is formed in a W shape. The central portion of the stage portion 620 protrudes upward, but is lower than the left and right ends. A game ball that has passed through a warp flow path flows into the stage portion 620 from the left end and rolls in the left-right direction. In addition, a game ball that bounces below the stage portion 620 can also flow in.

In this substantially W-shaped stage portion 620, an inclined surface that descends forward is formed at the lowest portion located on both sides of the central portion that protrudes upward. Due to this inclined surface, the game ball whose flow force is weakened on the stage portion 620 is guided from the front end of the stage portion 620 to the game region 32 below.

Further, in the stage portion 620 formed in a substantially W shape, a groove-shaped flow path extending in the front-rear direction and descending forward is formed at the portion serving as the apex of the central portion protruding upward. Has been done. This flow path is a shallow groove, and many game balls roll left and right without fitting in the groove. The game ball fitted in the flow path is guided forward and falls directly above the first starting winning opening 36, and has a high probability of flowing into the first starting winning opening 36.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal map start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal map variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the prize in the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, in the lower right of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the second special figure variation display game is provided. The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the left and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. It is almost vertical and maintains a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is tilted to the left by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device as shown in FIG. It can be rotated to change to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the normal variable winning device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normally variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In addition, there are two general winning openings 35 on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32.
Is arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged above the ordinary variable winning device 37.
The game balls that have won in these general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

At the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a special variable winning device (a special variable winning device that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game.
A large winning opening) 38 is arranged. The special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening that opens upward, and includes an opening / closing member that can open and close the opening of the large winning opening. The upper part of the opening / closing member is a flow path 38d through which the game ball can flow down because the opening / closing member forms the bottom surface, so that the game ball can flow down to the left.

The opening / closing member always holds a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) that closes the large winning opening. In this closed state, the game ball flowing down the flow path 38d passes above the large winning opening and flows down to the left of the special variable winning device 38. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode and a special gaming state is reached, the opening / closing member is moved from the flow path 38d by the large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. The game ball that has been evacuated and has flowed into the flow path 38d is changed to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player) that can flow into the large winning opening. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening.

Further, in the lower right portion of the center case 40, an information display device 630 for displaying information related to the special figure variation display game is provided. This information display device 630 has a first information display unit that displays the number of first start storages, which is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game, and a second start memory, which is the right to execute the second special figure variation display game. It is provided with a second information display unit that displays the number of. Further, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the 1st special figure variable display game is displayed by the 4th symbol separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the 1st to 3rd symbols on the display device 41. The decoration special figure 2 variation corresponding to the second special figure variation display game by the fourth symbol separately from the decoration special figure variation display game displayed by the third information display unit and the display device 41 by the first to third symbols. Display A fourth information display unit for displaying a game is provided.

The first information display unit and the second information display unit are each composed of two light emitting members, and the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit are each composed of one light emitting member. These six light emitting members are arranged in the information display device 630. Further, the information display device 630 is designed so as to be integrated with the surrounding design.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the first start winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 can be aimed at winning, and the right game area. By launching a game ball (so-called right-handed) to the normal map start gate 34
It is possible to aim for a prize in the ordinary variable prize device 37, the special variable prize device 38, and the general prize opening 35.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), a prize is given to the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form a special figure variable display game. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map fluctuation display game as a trigger and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like.
It consists of a special figure 1 display (1st special figure fluctuation display unit) 51 for a variable display game, a special figure 2 display (2nd special figure variable display unit) 52 for a special figure 2 variable display game, and an LED lamp. It is equipped with various indicators. The various indicators include a special figure 1 hold indicator for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a special figure 2 hold indicator for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game. .. In addition, a round display unit that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device is opened and closed), a first game status display unit that notifies whether the time is shortened (during normal electric support, during a specific game state), left. A second game state display unit is included to notify the player of the hit (normal hit) and the right hit, which is advantageous to the player (hit according to the game state). In addition, a third game state display unit (third game state display, probability state display unit) that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, and a normal map fluctuation display game. It includes a normal map display for the game and a normal map hold display for notifying the start memory of the game.

In the special figure 1 display 51, during the fluctuation time of the first special figure variation display game, the special figure 1 changing display that displays a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. Then, when the variation time of the first special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the first special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 1 variable display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result mode form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the first special figure variable display game.

In the special figure 2 display 52, during the fluctuation time of the second special figure variation display game, the special figure 2 changing display that displays a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. Then, when the variation time of the second special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the second special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 2 variation display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result mode form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the second special figure variation display game.

During the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game, the normal map display repeats the normal map fluctuation display in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. and,
When the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the normal map fluctuation display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result mode form identification information (normal map, normal symbol) for displaying the normal map variation display game.

The special figure 1 hold indicator displays the number of first start storages (first hold number), which is the execution right of the first special figure variation display game, by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of light emitting units. The special figure 2 hold indicator displays the number of second start memories (second hold number), which is the execution right of the second special figure variation display game, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of light emitting units. The normal figure hold display displays the number of normal figure start memories (the number of normal figure hold), which is the execution right of the normal figure fluctuation display game, by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of light emitting units.

When the round display unit is not in the special game state, all the light emitting units are turned off, and during the special game state, the lighting mode corresponds to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. The first game status display unit (time reduction status notification unit) turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state (when the fluctuation time reduction function is not activated) in which the time reduction state does not occur, and the time reduction state occurs. If it is (when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated), turn on the lamp. The second game status display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 turns off the lamp when the left-handed is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed (normal time), and is more than the left-handed. When right-handed is more advantageous for the player (when right-handed), the lamp is turned on. The third game state display unit turns on the LED when it is in a high probability state when the power is turned on, and turns off the LED when it is not in a high probability state.

Next, the details of the gaming board 30 in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 57, the game board 30 constitutes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped game board main body 80, a front component 600 constituting a front side portion of the center case 40, and a rear side portion of the center case 40, and is a game board. A rear component 700 to which various members necessary for 30 are attached is provided.

The front component 600 is attached by being fitted from the front side to the opening that penetrates the front and rear of the game board main body 80. The front component has an annular base member 610, and various members such as a warp flow path forming member 614 and an information display device 630 are attached to the base member 610. The base member 610 is formed with screw holes, screwed portions, bosses for positioning, recesses for receiving bosses, slits for receiving ribs, and the like, so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions on the base member 610. At the same time, the front component 600 can be fixed at an appropriate position with respect to the game board main body.

A regulation wall 613 is provided on the front surface of the base member 610, except for a portion where the stage portion 620 and the warp flow path forming member 614 are arranged. The regulation wall 613 has a front-rear width of the game area 32 (a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front of the game board 30 from the front surface of the game board main body 80).
It extends forward by the amount of the width to the back side of. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area 32 are restricted from flowing into the center case 40, the visibility of the display device 41 is ensured, and the number of game balls flowing into the stage portion 620 is limited. There is.

The rear component 700 constituting the back surface side of the game board main body 80 has a recess 711 opened in the front.
The rear base member 710 has a substantially rectangular box shape, and the rear base member 710 is formed with screw holes, screwed portions, bosses for positioning, recesses for receiving bosses, slits for receiving ribs, and the like. It is possible to fix various members in an appropriate position. Further, at the front end of the rear base member 710, a collar-shaped fixing portion 713 extending outwardly perpendicular to the side wall 712 is formed, and the rear component 700 is designated on the back surface of the game board main body 80. It can be fixed in position. Further, a through hole 715 that penetrates back and forth is formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. The through hole 715 makes the display surface of the display device 41 attached to the rear of the rear base member 710 visible.

The display device 41 attached to the back surface of the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 includes a liquid crystal display device having a display surface capable of covering the entire through hole 715 formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. There is. By attaching the display device 41 so that the display surface is on the front side, the image of the display surface can be visually recognized from the front of the game board 30 through the through hole 715 formed in the rear base member 710. Has been done. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with the liquid crystal display device, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT, for example.

Inside the recess 711 of the rear base member 710, a discharge flow path unit 720 is formed with a discharge flow path for the winning game ball in each winning opening, and a game ball detection sensor is provided. A decorative device 46 is provided. As the plurality of board effect devices 44, an upper movable decoration unit 210 and a lower movable decoration unit 510, which are movable effect devices that produce a game by operating, are provided.

As shown in FIG. 58, the upper movable decorative unit 210 is arranged on the upper side of the display area of the display device 41, and is a first position capable of moving up and down as shown in FIG. 58 (a) from the initial state shown in FIG. 56.
An upper movable member 230 and a second upper movable member 219 that can rotate from the initial state shown in FIG. 56 as shown in FIG. 58 (b) are provided.

Returning to FIG. 57, the upper movable decorative unit 210 includes a base member 211 attached to the rear base member 710. The base member 211 has a U-shape when viewed from the front side, and has an upper base portion 212 arranged above the display area and a left base portion 213 arranged to the left when viewed from the front side of the display area. , A right base portion 214 arranged on the right side when viewed from the front side of the display area.

A guide portion 215 extending in the vertical direction is provided at the right end portion of the left base portion 213 and the left end portion of the right base portion 214. The guide portion 215 guides the first upper movable member 230 along the vertical direction. Further, the left base portion 213 and the right base portion 214 have
First, a drive mechanism 216 for driving the movable member 230 up and down is provided. Each drive mechanism 216 has a motor as a drive source, and the link member 217 is driven by driving the motor.
The first upper movable member 230 can be driven up and down by operating the above.

The link member 217 is rotatably attached to the left base portion 213 and the right base portion 214, respectively, and is arranged so as to extend in directions facing each other. The link member 217 has a rotation shaft whose one end extends forward along the front-rear direction provided on the left base portion 213 or a rotation shaft extending forward along the front-rear direction provided on the right base portion 214. It is rotatably supported by a moving shaft. Further, the other end of the link member 217 is slidably connected to a connecting portion 222 provided on the mounting member 239 attached to the unit base portion 221 (see FIG. 59) to which the first upper movable member 230 is attached. .. Further, although not shown here, the second upper movable member 219 shown in FIG. 58B is attached to the front surface of the link member 217 so as to cover the front side of the link member 217.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the unit base portion 221 is a plate-shaped portion extending to the left and right, and the first upper movable member 230 is attached to the central portion. Connection portions 222 for connecting the link members are provided on the left and right of the portion of the unit base portion to which the first upper movable member 230 is attached. The connection portion 222 is an elongated hole that penetrates back and forth and extends to the left and right.
The end portion of the link member 217 is slidably connected to the connection portion 222, and the unit base portion 221 moves up and down according to the operation of the link member 217 based on the drive of the motor. Further, at the left and right ends of the unit base portion 221, guided portions 223 guided by the guide portions 215 provided on the left base portion 213 and the right base portion 214 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 60, the first movable member 230 includes a light emitting unit 240 attached to the unit base portion 221. The light emitting unit 240 includes a light emitting decoration unit 256 that decorates with light. Further, a drive mechanism for driving the covering member 248 provided in the light emitting decoration portion 256 is provided on the upper portion of the light emitting unit 240, and the upper cover member 255 is attached so as to cover the upper portion of the drive mechanism. Further, the light emitting unit 240 is provided with a cover member 231 that covers the outer periphery of the light emitting decorative portion 256. The cover member 231 is made of a material that can transmit light.

An inner decorative member 232 and an outer decorative member 233 are arranged on the front side of the light emitting unit 240. As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the inner decorative member 232 is provided with a through hole 232a in a portion facing the light emitting decorative portion 256, and as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the light emitting decorative portion 25 is provided through the through hole 232a.
6 is made visible. Further, the outer decorative member 233 is arranged on the front side of the inner decorative member 232, and is decorated to surround the periphery of the through hole 232a.

Returning to FIG. 60, a reflector 235 that reflects light forward is arranged behind the light emitting unit 240. The reflector 235 is provided with a through hole 235a at a position on the left and right rear of the light emitting decoration portion 256. Behind the through hole 235a, a substrate lens 236, which is a lens member capable of transmitting light so as to close the through hole 235a, is attached, and the substrate lens 2 is attached.
Behind the 36, an LED board 237 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged on the front surface is arranged. Also, LE
A board cover 238 is attached to the rear of the D board 237.

Further, a reflector lens 234, which is a lens member capable of transmitting light, is attached in front of the through hole 235a. The reflector lens 234 has a function of collecting the light from the LED substrate 237 on the covering member 248 side (center of the light emitting unit 240). As a result, L
The light emitting decoration portion 256 can be decorated from the rear side surface by the light from the ED.
Further, the reflector lens 234 is an LED of the light emitting unit 250 provided in the light emitting decoration unit 256.
The light from the substrate 250b (see FIG. 62) is reflected to assist the decoration by the light emission in the light emitting decoration unit 256. Further, the reflector lens 234 includes an LED substrate 237 and an LED substrate 25.
By transmitting a part of the light from 0b and irradiating the reflector 235 and the interior decoration member 232 arranged around it, the light is scattered inside the light emitting unit 240 and the decoration by the light is efficient. It has a function to make it common.

Further, behind the reflector 235, a first upper movable member 230 is placed on the unit base portion 221.
A mounting member 239 for mounting on the front surface of the is arranged. A reflector 235 and a light emitting unit 240 are mounted on the front surface side of the mounting member 239. again,
The mounting member 239 is provided with a connecting portion 222 to which the link member 217 for moving the first upper movable member 230 up and down is slidably connected.

As shown in FIG. 62, the light emitting unit 240 includes a motor 241 serving as a drive source and a motor 24.
A motor cover 242 covering 1 is provided. The drive shaft 241a of the motor 241 is arranged so as to extend upward along the vertical direction, and a drive gear 243 is attached to the drive shaft 241a. The drive gear 243 can transmit a driving force to the ring gear 245 via the driven gear 244. Further, a bearing member 254 for axially supporting the driven gear 244 is arranged below the driven gear 244.

A support member 246 that rotatably supports the ring gear is fitted to the inner peripheral portion of the ring gear 245. The support member 246 is fixed to the upper cover member 255 via a support shaft 249 inserted in the center. Further, a rotating portion 247 to which the covering member 248 is attached is attached to the ring gear 245, and the rotating portion 247 and the covering member 248 attached to the rotating portion 247 move in the vertical direction as the ring gear 245 rotates. It is designed to rotate around an axis along the axis.

A through hole 247a penetrating vertically is formed at the center of the rotating portion 247, and the through hole 247 is formed.
The support shaft 249 penetrates a vertically. A light emitting unit 250 is attached to the support shaft 249 penetrating below the through hole 247a. The light emitting unit 250 includes a decorative lens member 250a which is a lens member capable of transmitting light, and an LED substrate 250b in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged on the front surface is attached to the back surface side of the decorative lens member 250a.

As shown in FIGS. 59, in the light emitting decorative part 256 composed of the light emitting part 250 and the covering member 248, the covering member 248 rotates around the light emitting part 250, as shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b). The light emitting unit 250 changes to a covered state in which it cannot be seen from the front and a retracted state in which the light emitting unit 250 can be seen from the front as shown in FIGS. 59 (c) and 59 (d). It is possible.

Further, although the covering member 248 is mostly made of a material that does not transmit light, a transmitting portion 248a that can transmit light is provided along the border of the decorative pattern. As a result, FIG. 59
As shown in (a) and (b), even in a state where the covering member 248 is positioned so as to cover the front side of the light emitting unit 250, the light from the light emitting unit 250 can be visually recognized through the transmitting unit 248a. Even in this state, decoration with light is possible. Further, the light transmitted through the transmission portion 248a projects a decorative pattern in the shape of the transmission portion 248a onto the cover member 231. The cover member 2
Although 31 is made of a transparent member, by making it translucent so as to scatter a part of the transmitted light, the decorative pattern by the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 248a becomes easier to see and the decorative effect is enhanced. Can be done.

Further, the driving force is transmitted to the detection gear 252 for detecting that the covering member 248 is in the initial position via the ring gear 245. The detection gear 252 is provided with a light-shielding plate 252a, and by detecting the light-shielding plate 252a with the detection sensor 253, it is possible to detect that the light-shielding plate 252a is in the initial position.

The detection sensor 253 is an optical sensor in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other at a predetermined interval, and outputs an ON signal by detecting light from the light emitting unit in the light receiving unit.
When the covering member 248 is in the initial position, the light-shielding plate 252a is located between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the detection sensor 253 as shown in FIG. 59A, and the output of the detection sensor 253 is turned off. Has been made. Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), when the covering member 248 operates from the initial position, the light shielding plate 252a retracts from between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the detection sensor 253, and the output of the detection sensor 253 is turned on. This makes it possible to detect that the covering member 248 is in the initial position.

From the above, it is possible to produce a game by motion in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. A movable staging device (upper movable decorative unit 210) is provided, and the movable staging device has a coating that can be converted into a covering state that covers the light emitting unit 250 and the front of the light emitting unit 250 and a retracted state that is retracted from the front of the light emitting unit 250. The covering member 248 includes a member 248, and the covering member 248 has a transmitting portion 248a capable of transmitting light from the light emitting portion 250, and the light from the light emitting portion 250 is visually recognized through the transmitting portion 248a even in the covered state. It will be possible. Therefore, since it is always possible to decorate with light, the decorativeness is enhanced and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the covering member 248 is centered on an axis passing through the center of the light emitting portion 250.
By rotating around, it is configured so that it can be converted into a covered state and a retracted state. Therefore, in the covered state, the decoration by the light from the light emitting unit 250 passing through the transmitting portion 248a is performed, and in the retracted state, the decoration by the direct light from the light emitting unit 250 is performed, and the decoration by the light having a different taste is performed. It will be possible. In addition, it is possible to decorate the game like a rotating light, which enables various effects and enhances the interest of the game.

Further, the covering member 248 is decorated on a surface that can be visually recognized by the player in the covered state, and the transmission portion 248a is provided along the decoration. therefore,
The decoration applied to the covering member 248 can be emphasized, the decorativeness can be improved, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

The covering member 248 may completely cover the periphery of the light emitting portion 250. Further, in this case, it is preferable that the range of the transmission portion 248a is wider than that of the above-described embodiment. Further, the range of the transmitting portion 248a may be different depending on the position in the circumferential direction so that the amount of light that can be visually recognized by rotation is different, and decoration by changing the amount of light may be possible.

As an effect of operating the covering member 248, it is conceivable to start rotation from the initial position shown in FIG. 59 (a) together with the light emission of the light emitting unit 250 at a predetermined effect on the display device 41 (at a predetermined timing). However, the light emitting unit 250 may rotate the covering member 248 without emitting light. That is, the decoration by the operation of the covering member 248 and the decoration by the light emission of the light emitting unit 250 can be performed independently, and the mode in which each is performed independently or the mode in which both are performed at the same time can be performed. As a result, various decorative modes can be realized, and the fun of the game can be improved.

For example, the appearance at the start of light emission differs between the case where the light emitting unit 250 emits light while the covering member 248 is rotated and the case where the covering member 248 starts rotating while the light emitting unit 250 emits light, resulting in different impressions. Can be given. In particular, when the light emitting unit 250 emits light in a state where the covering member 248 is rotated, the change in the light emitting mode visually recognized by the player starts from an early stage, and the effect is more decorative.

Further, since the consciousness is usually directed to the effect display on the display device 41, the player does not easily notice by rotating the covering member 248 without performing special notification and without causing the light emitting unit 250 to emit light. It becomes possible to carry out the production of. That is, it can be an effect that only the player who sees the covering member 248 at the right time can know the operation of the covering member 248. For example, by performing such an effect as a notification that a special result will be obtained, it is possible to give the player who has noticed a sense of superiority and improve the interest of the game. Further, by foretelling that the light emitting member 250 emits light after such an effect, a preliminary notice (main notification) of the notification (main notification) performed by the light emission of the light emitting unit 250 and the rotation of the covering member 248 (main notification). (Advance notification) can be used, and the interest of notification production can be improved.

<Character assembly production>
In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, as a suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the notification (main notification) performed by the light emission of the light emitting unit 250 and the rotation of the covering member 248, the first upper movable member 230 is before the operation (that is, that is). Before the execution of this notification), it is possible to execute an accessory assembly effect that displays a moving image that imitates the completion of the first upper movable member 230 from a plurality of parts.
It should be noted that the advance notice (advance notification) of the previous stage of the notification (main notification) performed by the light emission of the light emitting unit 250 and the rotation of the covering member 248 and the drop of the first upper movable member 230 (see FIG. 58 (a)) are executed. As a suggestion effect suggesting that, before the operation of the first upper movable member 230 (that is, before the execution of the advance notification), a role of displaying a moving image simulating the completion of the first upper movable member 230 from a plurality of parts. It is also possible to configure it to perform an assembly effect.

As shown in FIG. 60, for example, the first upper movable member 230 includes an outer decorative member 233, an inner decorative member 232, a cover member 231, a light emitting unit 240, an upper cover member 255, a reflector lens 234, and a reflector. 235, mounting member 239, substrate lens 236,
It consists of an LED substrate 237, a substrate cover 238, and a plurality of screws (not shown).

63 to 64 show an example of the display on the display device 41 at the time of executing the accessory assembly effect.
As shown in FIG. 63 (a), for example, the effect control device 300 performs a variable display effect of displaying a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game as the special figure variable display game is executed. Run. Then, at a predetermined timing, the effect control device 300 starts the effect assembly effect.
In the accessory assembly effect, first, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), for example, a component image imitating a component constituting the first upper movable member 230 is displayed.

In the example shown here, among the component images imitating the parts constituting the first upper movable member 230, the component image imitating the light emitting unit 240 and the component image imitating the upper cover member 255 are already combined. In addition, the component image imitating the reflector lens 234 and the component image imitating the reflector 235 have already been combined, and the component image imitating the substrate lens 236, the component image imitating the LED substrate 237, and the component imitating the substrate cover 238. The images have already been merged. That is, in order to start the accessory assembly effect from the state where a part of the component image is united, a part of the steps (that is, the process of combining the light emitting unit 240 and the upper cover member 255, the reflector lens 234 and the reflector 235 are combined. Process, substrate lens 236, LED substrate 237 and substrate cover 2
The step of combining 38) will be omitted. In this way, by performing the accessory assembly effect of assembling the first upper movable member 230 by omitting a part of the actual process, the internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 is clarified even if the accessory assembly effect is performed. Therefore, the first movable member 2
It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against 30. That is, if the internal structure of the first movable member 230 is clarified, there is a possibility of promoting mischief such as mischief on the first movable member 230. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 is not clarified even if the accessory assembly effect is performed, the accessory assembly effect promotes fraudulent acts on the first upper movable member 230. Not a factor. In addition, the process omitted in the accessory assembly production is
It is not limited to these steps and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the example shown here, the part image imitating a screw is omitted from the part images imitating the parts constituting the first movable member 230. In this way, by performing the accessory assembly effect of assembling the first upper movable member 230 from a plurality of parts in which some of the actual parts are omitted, the inside of the first upper movable member 230 is performed even if the accessory assembly effect is performed. Since the structure is not clear, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the first movable member 230. The parts omitted in the accessory assembly effect are not limited to screws and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the inner decorative member 232 is actually screwed to the reflector 235, but in the example shown here, since the part image imitating the screw is omitted, the inner decorative member 232 is referred to as the outer decorative member 233. It can be made to appear to be sandwiched between the reflector and the 235. In this way, by assembling some parts by an assembly method different from the actual one and performing the accessory assembly effect of assembling the first upper movable member 230, even if the accessory assembly effect is performed, the first upper movable member 230 Since the internal structure is not clarified, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the first movable member 230. In addition, in the accessory assembly production, the assembly method different from the actual one is not limited to different methods such as pinching and screwing, and for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (a) described later, the parts on the receiving side ( It may be different (parts to be assembled). Further, the parts (assembled parts) to be assembled by an assembling method different from the actual one in the accessory assembly effect are not limited to the internal decorative member 232 and can be appropriately changed.

Further, in the accessory assembly effect, the probability setting value currently set is suggested by the display mode of at least one component image among the plurality of component images. In the example shown here, the component image imitating the light emitting unit 240 is decorated to imitate the transparent portion 248a.
Moreover, the color of the component image is white.

FIG. 64 (c) shows an example of a display mode corresponding to the currently set probability setting value. For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (c), the transparent portion 248a is shown in the component image imitating the light emitting unit 240.
If the color of the part image is white, it corresponds to "Setting 2". Therefore, in the example shown here, the currently set probability setting value is "Setting 2". It suggests that.
The display mode corresponding to the currently set probability setting value is not limited to that shown in FIG. 64 (c).
Further, it is also possible to suggest the currently set probability setting value by the display mode of the component image imitating the component other than the light emitting unit 240.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the light emitting unit 240 (upper cover member 255).
235), the reflector 235 (including the reflector lens 234), the mounting member 239, and the substrate lens 236 (including the LED substrate 237 and the substrate cover 238) are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), for example, a moving image simulating the process of combining the inner decorative member 232 and the outer decorative member 233 is displayed. The interior decoration member 232 is actually a reflector 235.
However, here, the parts on the receiving side (assembled parts) are different from the actual ones so that the internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 is not clarified even if the accessory assembly effect is performed.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the cover member 231 and the cover member 23
The first upper movable member 230 is made by combining the combined parts group (light emitting unit 240, etc.) behind 1 and the combined parts group (external decorative member 233, etc.) in front of the cover member 231.
A video that imitates the process of completing is displayed. As a result, an image of the accessory that imitates the first movable member 230 is displayed.
After that, the effect control device 300 is notified by the light emission of the light emitting unit 250 and the rotation of the covering member 248 (main notification), or by the light emission of the light emitting unit 250 and the rotation of the covering member 248 (main notification). ) Preliminary notice (advance notification) or the fall of the first upper movable member 230 (
FIG. 58 (a)) is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, depending on the display mode of the part image among the production modes of the accessory assembly effect,
The probability setting value currently set is suggested, but the probability setting value is not limited to this, and the probability setting value currently set by other modes may be suggested in place of (or in addition to) the display mode of the part image. It is possible.
For example, the probability setting value may be suggested by the number of component images to be omitted, for example, the smaller the number of component images to be omitted, the higher the probability setting value.
Further, for example, the currently set probability setting value may be suggested by the combination of colors and patterns of each component image.
Further, for example, a component image imitating a screw may be displayed, and a probability setting value currently set may be suggested depending on the rotation direction, rotation speed, or the like of the component image. At that time, it is also possible to display an effect image for emphasizing the rotation (for example, an image of a spark that seems to be generated by the rotation).

Further, for example, the larger the number of processes appearing during the accessory assembly effect, the higher the probability setting value. For example, the number of processes appearing during the accessory assembly effect suggests the currently set probability setting value. Is also good.
Further, the display area of the display device 41 is divided into a plurality of small areas, an accessory assembly effect of simultaneously performing a plurality of steps in one small area is executed, and each of the plurality of processes is separated in another small area. It is also possible to configure it to do so.
Further, for example, if the probability setting value is lower as the number of processes that do not satisfy the predetermined assembly order condition among the processes appearing in the accessory assembly effect is larger, the assembly order of the first upper movable member 230 in the accessory assembly effect is increased. May suggest the currently set probability setting value.
Further, it is currently set by the rotation speed of the covering member 248 in the completed image (that is, the accessory image imitating the first movable member 230), such that the faster the rotation of the covering member 248 is, the higher the probability setting value is. You may suggest a probability setting value. It is also possible to suggest the currently set probability setting value depending on the rotation direction of the covering member 248 in the completed image, the presence / absence of light emission of the light emitting unit 250 in the completed image, the light emission color, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, some steps are omitted in order to prevent the internal structure of the first movable member 230 from being clarified, that is, to conceal the accurate internal structure of the first movable member 230. Although the accessory assembly effect is performed in the effect mode, the effect mode in which some parts are omitted, and the effect mode in which the assembly method is different, the accessory assembly effect is performed in any one of these effect modes. The exact internal structure of the first movable member 230 can be concealed just by performing the above. Therefore, the accessory assembly effect may be performed in any one of these effect modes. Further, in addition to these production modes (or in place of a part or all of these production modes), by performing the accessory assembly production in other production modes, the first upper movable member 230 can be accurately inside. It is possible to keep the structure secret.
For example, an accessory assembly effect of assembling the first movable member 230 from a plurality of parts including parts different from the actual ones may be executed. That is, as another effect mode, even when the effect mode in which the parts are different is performed, the internal structure of the first movable member 230 can be prevented from being clarified.
Further, for example, an accessory assembly effect of assembling the first movable member 230 by adding extra parts may be executed. That is, as another effect mode, an effect mode in which extra parts are added may be performed.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the second embodiment, the game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game value is given to the player. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state, a staging device (first upper movable member 230) that is composed of a plurality of members (parts) and performs a game-related effect by performing a predetermined operation, and a staging device. A staging control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling the device is provided, and the staging control means is a series of staging (book) that imitates the completion of the staging device by a plurality of members before the operation of the staging device. In the case of the embodiment, it is possible to execute an assembly effect (feature assembly effect) for displaying a moving image), and it is possible to suggest predetermined information depending on the effect mode of the assembly effect.
Therefore, since it is possible to perform a novel effect before the operation of the effect device (first upper movable member 230), it is possible to enhance the interest in the effect device.
The effect device is not limited to the first upper movable member 230 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the moving portion of the lower movable decorative unit 510 (the first decorative member 550 that can move in the vertical direction, can move in the vertical direction). It may be the second decorative member 560).

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, a setting means (setting means capable of setting one probability setting value from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game (special figure variation display game) is assigned. The game control device 100) is provided, and it can be configured so that it is possible to suggest a probability setting value set by the setting means as predetermined information depending on the production mode of the assembly effect (the game control device 100) is provided.
See FIG. 64 (c)).
With this configuration, the probability setting value can be suggested by the effect mode of the assembly effect (feature assembly effect), so that a novel effect can be executed before the operation of the effect device (first upper movable member 230). It is possible to enhance the interest in the staging device.
It should be noted that the predetermined information, that is, the information suggested by the effect mode of the assembly effect (feature assembly effect) is not limited to the probability set value and can be changed as appropriate. It may be the degree of expectation of.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the assembly effect (role assembly effect) is performed by the effect device (
First, it is a series of effects in which component images (part images) imitating members (parts) constituting the movable member 230) are assembled in a predetermined order, and a display mode of a part of the component images in the assembly effect is shown. By changing to a specific display mode (for example, a mode decorated with "super heat!"), It is possible to configure the game result to be able to suggest the degree of expectation that the result of the game will be a special result as predetermined information.
With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that will be a big hit depending on the production mode of the assembly effect (role assembly effect), so a novel effect is executed before the operation of the effect device (first upper movable member 230). It is possible to enhance the interest in the staging device.
It should be noted that the predetermined information, that is, the information suggested by the effect mode of the assembly effect (feature assembly effect) is not limited to the degree of expectation of a big hit and can be changed as appropriate. It may be the degree of expectation of.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the assembly effect (role assembly effect) is performed by the effect device (
First, it is a series of effects of synthesizing component images (part images) imitating members (parts) constituting the movable member 230) in a predetermined order, and displays a part of the component images in the assembly effect. By changing to a specific display mode (for example, a mode decorated with "super heat!")
As predetermined information, it can be configured so that the result of the game can suggest the degree of expectation that the result is a special result.
With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that will be a big hit depending on the production mode of the assembly effect (role assembly effect), so a novel effect is executed before the operation of the effect device (first upper movable member 230). It is possible to enhance the interest in the staging device.
It should be noted that the predetermined information, that is, the information suggested by the effect mode of the assembly effect (feature assembly effect) is not limited to the degree of expectation of a big hit and can be changed as appropriate. It may be the degree of expectation of.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the assembly effect (role assembly effect), some parts are assembled by an assembly method different from the actual one to assemble the effect device (first upper movable member 230). Can be configured.
With this configuration, the internal structure of the effect device (first upper movable member 230) is not clarified even if the assembly effect (role assembly effect) is performed, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the effect device. Will be.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the assembly effect (role assembly effect), the effect device (first upper movable member 230) is configured to be assembled from a plurality of parts including parts different from the actual ones. Can be done.
With this configuration, the internal structure of the effect device (first upper movable member 230) is not clarified even if the assembly effect (role assembly effect) is performed, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the effect device. Will be.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the assembly effect (role assembly effect), a part of the actual process may be omitted to assemble the effect device (first upper movable member 230). can.
With this configuration, the internal structure of the effect device (first upper movable member 230) is not clarified even if the assembly effect (role assembly effect) is performed, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the effect device. Will be.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the assembly effect (role assembly effect), the effect device (first upper movable member 230) is assembled from a plurality of parts in which some of the actual parts are omitted. can do.
With this configuration, the internal structure of the effect device (first upper movable member 230) is not clarified even if the assembly effect (role assembly effect) is performed, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the effect device. Will be.

In the accessory assembly production, among the parts constituting the first movable member 230, those that are difficult for the player to understand or that are invisible (or difficult to see) may be grouped into virtual parts. Further, at that time, the probability setting value and the jackpot expectation may be suggested according to the display mode of the virtual component.
Further, the component image imitating the component constituting the first movable member 230 does not have to be an image that realistically reproduces the actual component, and may be an image obtained by deforming the actual component.
Further, in the above embodiment, the accessory assembly effect of the completed pattern in which the first upper movable member 230 is completely assembled is illustrated, but even if there is an unfinished pattern assembly effect in which the first upper movable member 230 is not assembled well. good.
It is also possible to display a notification image that informs the remaining length of the execution time of the accessory assembly effect. Further, at that time, an integrated image in which one component image and a notification image for notifying the remaining length of the execution time of the accessory assembly effect may be integrated may be displayed.

In addition, in the accessory assembly production, some parts are omitted, extra parts are added,
This is because the player may overlook the case where the display mode of the part image is the setting suggestion mode, the virtual part is displayed, the display mode of the virtual part is the expectation suggestion mode, and the like. , The display may be different depending on the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 and the sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b.
Further, in the accessory assembly effect, not only the appearance in which the accessory image is gradually completed only from one direction, but also the display in which the accessory image is assembled from another direction at a predetermined timing may be mixed.

Further, the first movable member 230 may be configured to fall to the front of the display area for displaying the accessory assembly effect. Specifically, for example, the position shown in FIG. 58 (a) is the first movable member 2
When the maximum drop position of 30, the accessory assembly effect is performed in the central portion of the display area of the display device 41, and then the first upper movable member 230 is placed in front of the central portion (overlaps the central portion in the front-rear direction). The pattern of dropping to a position, that is, to the maximum drop position, and the accessory assembly effect are performed at the upper part of the display area of the display device 41, and then the first upper movable member 230 is moved to the front of the upper part (upper part and front and back). The pattern of dropping (to the overlapping position) and the pattern may be made feasible. As a result, it is possible to suggest the drop position of the first upper movable member 230, and at the same time, another effect can be provided in the margin of the display area (display area where the accessory assembly effect is not performed) during the execution of the accessory assembly effect. Since it can be executed, the display space can be effectively used.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as the gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. Further, the configurations of the above-described embodiments and modifications can be appropriately combined and applied.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Pachinko machine 25 Direction button (Production operation means)
41 Display device 100 Game control device (setting means)
230 First upper movable member (staging device)
300 Staging control device (execution means, staging control means)
G1 promotion image G11 button image (operation means image)
G12 notification image (valid period notification image)
G13 instruction image (operation mode instruction image)
Y Concealed image Z Ornament special design (design)
Z1 number image (identification image)
Z2 character image

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can execute a variable display game based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions
An execution means for executing the variable display game by performing variable display and stop display of a symbol in each of a plurality of variable display areas is provided.
The symbol has a symbol configuration including an identification image and an erasable character image.
The character image is erased by causing the symbol to perform an operation different from the variation display of the symbol, high-speed variation display is performed in a configuration that does not include the character image, and then the symbol is displayed.
The high-speed fluctuation display was converted to a low-speed fluctuation display in which the symbol was varied and displayed at an identifiable speed, and an image hiding the symbol was displayed during the temporary stop display after the low-speed fluctuation display to make the symbol invisible . The first variation mode in which the image that hides the symbol is later erased to make the character image appear , and then the stop display is performed .
The high - speed fluctuation display is converted into the low -speed fluctuation display in which the symbol is variablely displayed at an identifiable speed, the character image is made to appear in the low-speed fluctuation display, and then the character image is displayed in a shorter period than the first fluctuation mode. The second variation mode in which the temporary stop display is performed and then the stop display is performed , and
The variable display game can be executed on at least one of the above .
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution period of the variation display game in which the first variation mode is executed is longer than the execution period of the variation display game in which the second variation mode is executed .

Images